User Guide

Ulead Systems, Inc.

September 2005

P/N: C22-180-110-0A0001
First edition for Ulead® MediaStudio Pro® 8, September 2005.

© 1992-2005 Ulead Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form
without the express written permission of Ulead Systems, Inc.

Software license
The software described in this document is furnished under a License Agreement which is included with the product. This
Agreement specifies the permitted and prohibited uses of the product.

Licenses and trademarks

All rights reserved. Ulead, the Ulead Systems logo, and MediaStudio are registered trademarks of Ulead Systems, Inc.
Intel, Pentium and MMX are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, DirectX
and/or other Microsoft products referenced herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. QuickTime and the
QuickTime logo are trademarks used under license. QuickTime is registered in the U.S. and other countries. All other
product names and any registered and unregistered trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification
purposes only and remain the exclusive property of their respective owners.

Sample files
Files provided as samples on the program CD can be used for personal demonstrations, productions and presentations.
No rights are granted for commercial reproduction or redistribution of any sample files.

North & South America International

Ulead Systems Inc. Ulead Systems, Inc.
http://www.ulead.com http://www.ulead.com
Support: http://www.ulead.com/tech http://www.asiapac.ulead.com
http://www.ulead.com.tw
Japan Support:
Ulead Systems Inc. http://www.ulead.com/tech
http://www.ulead.co.jp http://www.asiapac.ulead.com/tech
http://www.ulead.com.tw/tech
Support: http://www.ulead.co.jp/tech

Germany China
Ulead Systems GmbH Ulead Systems, Inc.
http://www.ulead.de http://www.ulead.com.cn
Support: http://www.ulead.de/tech Support: http://www.ulead.com.cn/tech

United Kingdom France

http://www.ulead.co.uk http://www.ulead.fr
Support: http://www.ulead.co.uk/tech Support: http://www.ulead.fr/tech
 Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 1: Welcome to MediaStudio Pro .......................... 13

Getting started ................................................................... 14
Installation ......................................................................... 15
Running the programs ........................................................ 16
Readme .............................................................................. 16

PA R T I : V I D E O E D I T O R

Chapter 1: Getting Started ............................................... 18

Understanding the workspace ............................................ 19
Standard Toolbar .............................................................20
Panel Manager ................................................................20
Timeline Toolbar ..............................................................21
Personalizing the workspace ..............................................21
Saving the layout ............................................................22
Setting up a video project .................................................. 22
Creating a new video project .............................................22
Opening an existing project ..............................................24
Customizing a video project ..............................................25
Project Options dialog box ................................................. 25
Saving project settings as a template .................................. 27
Enabling Smart Proxy .......................................................27
Saving a video project ......................................................27
Capturing video .................................................................. 28
Video Capture .................................................................28
Batch Capture .................................................................30
Scan DV Tape ..................................................................30
Creating project segments in Smart Compositor ................ 31
Using the Production Library .............................................. 36
Placing clips into the Production Library ..............................36
4 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Using the Storyboard ....................................................... 37

Nested timelines ............................................................. 38
Working with folders ........................................................ 38
Drag and drop ................................................................ 39
Viewing Production Library thumbnails ............................... 39
Adding effects to the Production Library ............................. 39
Preferences ........................................................................ 40

Chapter 2: Working with the Timeline ..............................45

Inserting clips .................................................................... 46
Inserting video, audio and image clips ................................ 46
Extracting extra audio tracks ..............................................47
Inserting voiceover .......................................................... 47
Inserting title, color, and silence clips ................................. 49
Inserting Ulead video file types .........................................49
Inserting UIS files ........................................................... 50
Inserting soundtracks from third-party music ...................... 50
Inserting Video Editor projects .......................................... 51
Push Away insertion ........................................................ 51
Working with tracks ........................................................... 52
Single-track editing ......................................................... 52
Adding or deleting tracks .................................................. 52
The Track buttons ........................................................... 52
Determining the visibility of clips ....................................... 53
Displaying clips on the Timeline ......................................... 53
Zooming in/out of the Timeline ......................................... 54
General Timeline and Summary Timeline ............................ 54
Creating nested timelines ................................................... 56
Inserting nested timelines ................................................ 56
Editing a timeline ............................................................ 57
Working with virtual clips .................................................. 57
Viewing virtual clips in the Source Window .......................... 58
Adding virtual clips to the Production Library .......................58

Chapter 3: Editing .............................................................59

Making selections in the Timeline ....................................... 60
Using the Clip Selection Tool ............................................ 60
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5

Using the Time Selection Tool ...........................................61

Using the Track Selection Tool ..........................................61
Using the Track buttons ....................................................62
Grouping clips .................................................................62
Working with clips .............................................................. 63
Pasting attributes ............................................................63
Aligning clips ...................................................................64
Splitting the audio from video clips ....................................64
Changing the volume of clips .............................................65
Changing the speed of clips ..............................................65
Reversing the frames of a clip ...........................................67
Relinking clips .................................................................67
Calibrating video clips ......................................................68
Freezing a frame .............................................................68
Setting field options for video clips .....................................69
Working with cues .............................................................. 71
Placing project cues .........................................................71
Placing clip cues ..............................................................72
Placing chapter cues .......................................................73
Locating clips ..................................................................... 73
Locating an empty time slot ..............................................74
Trimming clips .................................................................... 74
Trimming in the Source Window ........................................75
Trimming in the Preview Window ........................................ 76
Using the Trim Window ....................................................76
Using the Scissors Tool to trim clips ..................................77
Defining trim options ........................................................78
Smart Trim .....................................................................79
Multi-trim Video ................................................................. 79
Split by Scene ..................................................................... 81
Ripple Editing ..................................................................... 82
Ripple Editing examples ....................................................83
Inserting clips into the middle of an existing clip ..................84
Using the Source Window ................................................... 85
Previewing your work ........................................................ 88
Previewing ......................................................................89
6 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Instant Play ................................................................... 90

Using DV SmartPlay ......................................................... 92
Performing scrub previews ................................................ 92
Previewing on an external device ....................................... 93
Managing preview files ..................................................... 93

Chapter 4: Adding Effects and Titles .................................95

Using transition effects ...................................................... 96
Transition effects basics .................................................... 96
Customizing a transition ................................................... 97
Commonly used transitions ............................................... 99
The Flashback transition ................................................. 100
The Mask transitions ...................................................... 101
Mask transition options ....................................................102
Audio transitions ........................................................... 102
Using key frame controls in dialog boxes ......................... 103
Effects Manager ............................................................... 105
Previewing the applied effects ......................................... 106
Editing in the Preview Window ......................................... 107
Organizing effects ......................................................... 108
Overlay ............................................................................. 109
Overlay Options dialog box ............................................. 110
Overlay key types .......................................................... 111
Understanding Alpha Channels ........................................ 112
Using Gamma correction ................................................ 113
Working with mattes ...................................................... 114
Creating image and video mattes ......................................114
Using Grayscale mattes ...................................................115
Applying video filters ....................................................... 115
Applying a regional matte to a video filter ......................... 118
Video enhancement filters ................................................120
Enhance Lighting Tool ................................................... 120
Color Correction Tool .................................................... 121
Color correcting selected regions ................................... 122
Color correcting with the HSL wheel ............................... 122
Color correcting with Curves .......................................... 123
Global filters ................................................................. 124
Creating a moving path .................................................... 124
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7

Moving Path dialog box ................................................... 125

Creating 3D moving paths .............................................. 129
Managing key frames on a moving path ............................ 130
Inserting an image with moving path attributes ................. 131
Applying audio filters ....................................................... 131
Filling the left or right audio channel ................................ 132
Removing vocals ........................................................... 133
Creating titles ................................................................... 133
Insert Title Clip dialog box .............................................. 135

Chapter 5: Audio Mixing ................................................. 139

Audio Mixing Panel ........................................................... 140
Grouping audio tracks .................................................... 142
Modifying volume in real-time ......................................... 143

Chapter 6: Dolby Digital 5.1 Surround Sound ................. 145

Working with Dolby Digital 5.1
in Video Editor .................................................................. 146
Surround sound hardware requirements ........................... 146
Setting up surround sound projects .................................. 146
Mixing Dolby Surround ................................................... 147
Creating a surround sound audio file ................................ 150

Chapter 7: Creating and Exporting Final Video ............... 151

Creating a video file ......................................................... 152
Creating MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 files ..................................... 153
Creating HDV or HD video files ......................................... 153
Creating WMV HD files ................................................... 154
Creating WMV/ QuickTime streaming file .......................... 155
Determining your video save options ................................ 156
Performing a batch video creation .................................... 159
Creating a VCD ................................................................. 160
Creating an SVCD ............................................................. 160
Creating a DVD ................................................................. 161
Creating an audio file ....................................................... 162
Creating an image sequence ............................................. 163
8 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Analyzing a video file's data rate ...................................... 164

Recording to a digital video camcorder ............................ 165
External preview ........................................................... 166
Creating an Edit Decision List (EDL) file ........................... 167
Posting timecode ........................................................... 168
Outputting to analog video tape ....................................... 169
Exporting to Ulead DVD MovieFactory and Ulead DVD
DiskRecorder .................................................................... 171

Chapter 8: Managing Video Projects ...............................173

Smart Package ................................................................. 174
Smart Relink .................................................................... 175
Converting files ................................................................ 175
Smart Check & Convert .................................................. 176
Batch Convert ............................................................... 176
Using the Quick Command Panel ...................................... 177

Chapter 9: Integration with Ulead Products ...................179

VideoStudio project files .................................................. 180
PhotoImpact UFO files ..................................................... 180
Importing masks from PhotoImpact ................................ 180
COOL 3D Production Studio files ...................................... 181

Chapter 10: Shortcuts .....................................................183

PA R T I I : V I D E O C A P T U R E

Chapter 1: Getting started ............................................. 194

Understanding the basics ................................................. 195
Standard Toolbar .......................................................... 196
Navigation Bar .............................................................. 196
Preparation ...................................................................... 197
Connecting a DV or Digital 8 camcorder ............................ 197
Connecting an HDV camcorder ........................................ 198
Sony HDV camcorder .......................................................199
JVC HD camcorder ..........................................................199
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9

Connecting an analog video source .................................. 202

Connecting a USB camera ............................................... 203
Previewing video from your video source .......................... 203
Setting preview options .................................................. 203
Resizing the program window .......................................... 204
Defining audio input when capturing analog video .............. 204
Improving video signal when capturing analog video ....... 205
Calibrating your display .................................................. 205
Typical calibration settings ............................................... 207
Adjusting color with your video capture board ................... 207
Preferences ...................................................................... 208

Chapter 2: Capturing Video ............................................. 209

Tips for capturing video .................................................... 210
Before capturing ............................................................... 211
Enabling device control ................................................... 211
Choosing a capture plug-in ............................................. 212
Capturing video ................................................................ 213
Capture options ............................................................. 215
Capturing video from a DV camcorder .............................. 216
Capturing video from an HDV/HD camcorder ..................... 217
Direct MPEG capturing from a DV camcorder ..................... 218
Seamless DV and MPEG capture ...................................... 219
Direct WMV capturing ..................................................... 220
Selecting a profile .......................................................... 220
Editing and customizing a video profile .............................. 221
About dropped frames .................................................... 221
Capturing single frames .................................................. 222
Capturing a sequence of still frames ................................. 223
Capture history ............................................................. 223
Scanning a DV tape .......................................................... 224
Batch capturing ................................................................ 226
Importing and editing a batch list .................................... 228
Changing a file's properties .............................................. 229

Chapter 3: Shortcuts ...................................................... 231

10 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

PA R T I I I : A U D I O E D I T O R

Chapter 1: Getting Started ............................................. 236

Understanding the basics ................................................. 237
Playing audio files ......................................................... 239
Creating a new audio file ................................................ 239
Saving files ................................................................... 239
Saving files to a video ..................................................... 240
Changing audio properties .............................................. 240
Zooming ...................................................................... 240
Changing the view of a waveform ......................................241
Controlling the display and time unit of waveforms ..............242
Recording sound .............................................................. 243
Tips for determining audio quality .................................... 244
Preferences ...................................................................... 245

Chapter 2: Editing Audio Files .........................................247

Working with selections ................................................... 248
Making selections .......................................................... 248
Creating precise selections ............................................. 249
Clearing audio data ....................................................... 249
Inserting audio data ...................................................... 250
Working with cues ........................................................... 251
Managing cues .............................................................. 252
Using cues with Video Editor ........................................... 252
Enhancing sound .............................................................. 253
Changing the audio level ................................................ 253
Changing pitch .............................................................. 254
Quantizing a waveform .................................................. 254
Working with silence ...................................................... 255
Removing background noise ........................................... 255
Muting a waveform .........................................................256
Calibrating files recorded from different sources ................ 256
Mixing tracks .................................................................... 257
Removing a mixed track ................................................. 257
Applying special effects .................................................... 258
Performing a fade .......................................................... 258
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 11

Changing speed ............................................................. 259

Performing a stereo pan ................................................. 259
Reversing a file ............................................................. 260
Performing an echo ........................................................ 260
Performing a cross fade .................................................. 261
Using DirectX Audio plug-ins ........................................... 262

Chapter 3: Shortcuts ...................................................... 263

PA R T I V : M O R E P R O G R A M S

Ulead DVD MovieFactory ................................................ 269

Launching DVD MovieFactory ........................................... 269
Start Project ..................................................................... 269
Add Media ........................................................................ 270
Adding/Editing chapters .................................................. 271
Export selected clips ...................................................... 272
Setup Preferences, Project Settings and other options ..... 273
Settings and options ..................................................... 273
Preferences ................................................................... 273
Project settings ............................................................ 275
16:9 DVD ...................................................................... 276
Play and edit media .......................................................... 276
The right-click menu ...................................................... 277
Trimming a video .......................................................... 278
Setup menus .................................................................... 278
Manipulating objects ...................................................... 281
Displayed thumbnail and text style .................................. 281
Layout settings ............................................................. 282
Preview ............................................................................ 282
Burn ................................................................................. 283
Burning options ............................................................. 284
The Burning Options dialog box ....................................... 285

Ulead DVD DiskRecorder ............................................... 287

System requirements ....................................................... 287
12 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Hardware checkup and configuration ............................... 287

Running DVD DiskRecorder .............................................. 287
Important terms to know ................................................. 288
Preferences ...................................................................... 288
Create Disc ....................................................................... 289
Introduction to the workspace ......................................... 289
Adding video files .......................................................... 290
Editing programs ........................................................... 290
Protecting programs ...................................................... 290
Playlist ......................................................................... 291
Setting the name for a program, playlist, or entry point ...... 291
Exporting video or image files ......................................... 292
Burning your disc .......................................................... 293
Edit Disc ........................................................................... 294
Formatting a disc .......................................................... 294
Protecting a disc ............................................................ 294
Certifying a disc ............................................................ 295

INDEX

Index ............................................................................... 298

 INTRODUCTION

WELCOME TO MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Congratulations on purchasing Ulead MediaStudio Pro, the ultimate video

editing solution for desktop professionals and digital video enthusiasts. Built
around a powerful suite of versatile and high performance programs,
MediaStudio Pro is the first choice for anyone wanting to work with video.
MediaStudio Pro offers Real-time MPEG capture, Real-time preview and Real-
time output. With intuitive controls and seamless integration, creating video
has never been easier or more accessible.
14 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Getting started
If you ever worked with digital video before, you can start working in MediaStudio
Pro right away. The program is equally intuitive for both - the novice users and
professionals. The fastest way to learn the program is direct interaction with its
tools. The more advanced features, however, are not on the surface and you might
well refer to the manual for particular answers on specific questions.

There are several sources of information that will help you explore the broad range
of MediaStudio Pro features: the manual, online help, and the MediaStudio Pro
Web site that contains tutorials and a host of other useful informative content.

All the information required to master MediaStudio Pro is in the manual and online
help. These are the primary sources of information.

The MediaStudio Pro Web site (www.ulead.com/msp/runme.htm) also has a

number of resources you will find useful.

The Web-based learning center has excellent tutorials that will guide you through
the program in a brief and intense way. Spending a few hours on the tutorial page
(http://www.ulead.com/learning/msp.htm) will empower you with an intimate
knowledge of MediaStudio Pro tools.

There are also a few private Web sites that have great tutorials and sample
projects. One of the best is the MediaStudio User’s Group, or MUG, at
www.mugcentral.com. This is the home base for the MUG mailing list, which you
can subscribe to at this site. Everyday, dozens of users, including quite a few video
professionals, ask and answer questions in an amazingly useful forum.
 WELCOME TO MEDIASTUDIO PRO 15

Installation
The MediaStudio Pro installation program runs from within Windows and contains
complete instructions to take you through the installation process.

To install MediaStudio Pro:

1. Read the license agreement that comes with the MediaStudio Pro package. The
license agreement contains important legal requirements that you need to be
aware of. If you agree to abide by it, continue with the installation.

Please take a moment to fill out the registration card during installation.
Becoming a registered user entitles you to product updates and upgrade
information, as well as technical support. You can also instantly register
online (electronically) after installing the program.

2. Insert the MediaStudio Pro CD into your CD-ROM drive. Windows should detect
the CD and then automatically run the installation program. If the automatic
detection feature is turned off, use Windows Explorer to run the SETUP.EXE
program directly from your CD-ROM drive.

Follow the installation program instructions. While the program is installing files, a
window will appear, displaying information about MediaStudio Pro and the
installation status.

If you want to browse the contents of the MediaStudio Pro CD, run AUTOEXEC.EXE
found in the Setup folder from your CD-ROM drive.

Installing Acrobat Reader

An electronic copy of this user guide is also available in the Adobe Acrobat format
(Portable Document Format - PDF). To view this, first run the AR500ENU.EXE file
(in the \Driver folder of the first MediaStudio Pro CD) and follow the installation
instructions. After successfully installing the Reader program, run the program and
click File: Open to open the file MediaStudio Pro 8 User Guide.PDF that is in the
\Document folder of the CD. You can then view the user guide.
16 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Running the programs

To run the MediaStudio Pro programs, click on the desired program in the Start:
Programs - Ulead MediaStudio Pro 8 submenu. This submenu may differ
depending on the choices you made during installation. If you are already working
in any of these programs, the easiest method to run another MediaStudio Pro
program is by using the Switch menu, located on the right of the Menu Bar.

Readme
In the fast paced world of software, changes occur almost daily. While we have
tried to keep this manual as up-to-date as possible, there will inevitably be some
things that did not make it into the book by press time. Please browse through the
Readme file installed in the Ulead MediaStudio Pro program folder to find out about
the latest notes, drivers, and troubleshooting tips.
PART I: VIDEO EDITOR
1

GETTING STARTED

This chapter introduces the Video Editor user interface, beginning with a
walkthrough of the workspace and its various components, followed by ways
on customizing and saving the workspace. You will also learn how to capture
video directly in Video Editor, manage your media using the Production
Library, and use some of the basic program functions.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Understanding the workspace

Setting up a video project
Capturing video
Creating project segments in Smart Compositor
Using the Production Library
Preferences
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 19

Understanding the workspace

The Timeline Window is where you assemble and edit your video project. It is
laid out horizontally and composed of several independent layers or 'tracks.' These
tracks hold the clips that make up a video project. The other windows in the Video
Editor workspace, such as the Preview Window and Effects Manager, are there to
help you in the editing process.

1 2 3 4

8 9 10 11

1 Standard Toolbar 7 Timeline Window

2 Panel Manager 8 Track buttons;
3 Effects Manager Lock, Hide and Solo buttons
4 Production Library and Project Tray 9 Video clip in the video track
5 Source Window and Preview Window 10 Transition effect clip
6 Timeline Toolbar 11 Audio clip in the audio track
20 VIDEO EDITOR

Standard Toolbar
Create a
new project

Open a
project file
Create a video file
Save a Video
Show and edit
Editor project
Project Settings

Cut a clip Help

from a project
Open Ulead
Home page
Copy a clip
from a project Find the next
clip in a project
Paste a clip into
the Timeline Find a clip in
a project

Redo an undone
function

Undo a previous
action

Panel Manager
The Panel Manager allows you to show or hide the different windows in the
workspace. You may dock it beside or below the Standard Toolbar, or float it
anywhere in the workspace as a separate toolbar panel.

Quick Command Panel Audio Mixing Panel

Source Window Production Library

Preview Window Effect Manager

Dock/Float Timeline Window

Layout Template
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 21

Timeline Toolbar
Insert Video File
Insert Audio File
Insert Voice File
Insert Image File
Insert Title Clip
Insert Color Clip
Insert Silence Clip
Insert Project File
Auto Music
Insert from Smart Compositor
Clip Selection
Scissors
Zoom
Time Selection
Track Selection
Time Stretch

No Ripple
Single-track Ripple Editing
Multi-track Ripple Editing
Normal Trim
Overwrite Trim
Stitch Trim
General Timeline
Summary Timeline
Add/Delete Tracks
Enable/Disable Video Proxy
Timeline Display Mode
Save Project Template

Personalizing the workspace

The different windows in Video Editor can be floated or docked in the workspace.
To dock a window, click on its title bar then drag it to the edge of another window
or to the edge of the workspace. You can also double-click on a window to make it
floating or docked.
22 VIDEO EDITOR

Saving the layout

Use the Layout Manager in the Window menu to save time arranging the
windows in the workspace. To save your custom layout, type a Layout Template
Name, then click Save To. Giving your layouts intelligible names like “Audio -
Video Editing” or “Timeline Only” will help you work faster and more enjoyable.

You can assign hotkeys for quickly switching between different layouts. Just select
a layout, then choose any [Alt + Number] combination from the Hot-Key
Mapping menu in the upper right of the dialog box.

To use a layout on the Video Editor workspace, select it from the Existing Layout
Templates list, then click OK.

You can also click in the Panel Manager to choose a workspace layout.

Setting up a video project

In Video Editor, the Timeline and its associated clips are referred to as a video
project, which is saved as a DVP (Digital Video Project) file. When you save a
video project, Video Editor only saves the positions and attributes of the clips in
the Timeline, not the actual source files themselves. The advantage to this is that
the DVP file has a relatively small file size and that any editing done is
nondestructive – that is, the editing doesn’t affect the original source files. The
next time you open a DVP file, Video Editor links the clips in the project to the
source files accordingly.

Creating a new video project

To get started in Video Editor, you first need to create a video project. The video
project not only holds the clips that you place into the Timeline, but also defines
the properties for the resulting video, such as the television standard and the size
of the frames used. Any clips that you place into the project subsequently adopt
those properties, regardless of their original attributes.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 23

To create a new video project:

1. Click the New button on the Standard Toolbar or File: New [Ctrl+N]. The
New dialog box opens displaying a list of project templates.
2. Select a video format (AVI or MPEG) to use for clips in your project from the
Edit file format drop-down list.

3. Click on the template you want to use. (Its properties, as well as an annotated
description, are displayed on the right side of the dialog box). You can choose
one of the following templates:
• DV - for editing and producing standard DV.
• DV 16:9 - for editing or producing widescreen 16:9 DV.
• DV 24P - for editing footage from a Panasonic AG-DVX100 camcorder
that was recorded in 24P or 24PA (24P Advanced) modes.
• DVD-Dolby Digital 5.1 channel - for editing and producing DVDs
encoded with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel surround sound.
• HDV templates - for editing and producing HDV- or HD-encoded video.
• And more...
4. Click OK. The dialog box closes and a new project is created.
24 VIDEO EDITOR

When you start a new project, you may find that none of the existing templates in
the New dialog box contains the exact attributes you want to use. You therefore
have the option of creating a custom template to suit your particular needs.

To create a template:
1. In the New dialog box, click the Create button. The Template Options dialog
box opens up.
2. Select and set the attributes for your new template.

For a more detailed explanation of setting up a template, see “Project

Options dialog box” on page 25. Also, it is a good idea to consult the
manual of your particular video capture board to see the recommended
specifications.

3. Click OK. The Save New Template dialog box opens up.
4. Select Save the current settings, and then type in a name and description for
your new template.
5. Click OK.

Your video project will now have the specified settings, and the next time you open
a new project, your customized template will be listed in the New dialog box.

When you run Video Editor for the first time, the New dialog box opens
automatically. If you regularly use the same properties for a video project,
you can hide the New dialog box each time you click New by clearing the
Always show this dialog box option. (Another way is to clear the Display
New dialog box option in the File: Preferences: General tab). Any
subsequent projects take their properties from the current project.

Opening an existing project

To open an existing project on your hard drive or from a network, select File -
Open or click on the Standard Toolbar. Locate your project folder, choose
the project file to load, and click Open.

To locate your project files fast, click Browse and navigate to your project
directory. Click Scan to perform a quick search for files with default
extensions *.dvp (Video Editor projects) or *.vsp (VideoStudio projects).
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 25

Customizing a video project

When you create a new project, its properties are determined by the New dialog
box settings. These settings are integral to your project and determine not only
how previews are created, but also the format of the final movie. You can change
these properties and customize your project through the Project Settings dialog
box.

To view and/or alter your project settings while in the project:

1. Click the Project Settings button or select Project: Project Settings

[ALT+ENTER]. This opens the Project Settings dialog box where you can
view the properties of your project.
2. To change any of the settings, click the Edit button to open the Project
Options dialog box. Click through the various tabs and then specify the
television standard you are using, such as NTSC or PAL, the frame rate, and the
frame size.

Project settings directly determine the default settings in the Video Save
Options dialog box which in turn determines your final video format. (See
“Determining your video save options” on page 156 for details).

Project Options dialog box

As mentioned earlier, the Project Options dialog box gives you direct control over
an existing project. There are three tabs in this dialog box:

Video Editor tab

• Select the desired TV standard.
• Choose whether or not to preview applied video filters when you view your
project in Video Editor.
• Specify the type of audio channel, Stereo or Multi-Channel Surround Sound,
that you will use for your project.

General tab
• Set the project Frame rate and Frame size.

The Frame rate option determines the number of frames for any
resulting video file. The appearance of the clip on the Timeline will not
change.
26 VIDEO EDITOR

• The Frame type option determines interlacing properties.

If your final output video is meant for playback on progressive interlaced TV, set
frame type to either Lower Field First or Upper field First.
If your output video allows for progressive frames (LCD monitors, plasma TVs,
TFT monitors, etc.), use the Frame-based option. This setting is more film-like
and less complicated to handle when editing or retiming your video.
• You can set the size for the target display and output screen to 4:3 (for
traditional letterbox TVs, computer monitors, or some DV camcorders) or 16:9
(widescreen used in HDTV, theaters, or some DV camcorders).
To use the 16:9 display, select Perform non-square pixel rendering on the
Video Editor tab first and choose 16:9 as the display aspect ratio on the
General tab.

• Be aware of the aspect ratio of the video files you are using and the
display aspect ratio of the intended playback screen for your videos. This
will help you determine which display aspect ratio to use in your projects.

• The aspect ratio is also important when dealing with moving paths in a
project. The moving path's aspect ratio should be similar to the aspect
ratio being used by the project.

AVI / Compression tab

This tab has all the video and audio compression controls.

One thing to remember in dealing with compression and data rate is output file
size. To minimize the size of your rendered projects, compress your files with the
best and the most recent compression algorithm possible.

Bit size is another way of saving your hard drive space. The bigger it is, the more
space you will need.

You will need to balance between compression, bit depth and quality of your video.
Experiment to preserve as much fidelity as possible using less memory space on
your storage.

Changing a project's properties clears the undo/redo history.

 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 27

Saving project settings as a template

After you have customized your video project, you can save your project settings
as a template by clicking the File: Save Project Template command. In the
dialog box that opens, give the template a name as well as a description. Presets
and previously created templates are also displayed in the Existing templates list
box. If you wish to replace one of these templates with the properties of the
current video project, select it and then click OK.

Enabling Smart Proxy

Proxy files are lower resolution working copies of video files. They are reduced in
resolution or compression bit rate for only one reason - to speed up editing of HDV
and other large video source files. Proxy files are source-dependent rather than
project-dependent. In other words, proxy files can be shared among different
projects.

When you edit and preview your project in Instant Play mode, proxy files will be
used as substitutes for their large video source counterparts. Whereas when you
preview your project in high-quality playback mode or when you render a video
file, the original video source files will be used. (See “Previewing your work” on
page 88 to know more on playback modes).

To enable the creation of proxy files, click in the Timeline Toolbar, or go to File:
Preferences - Smart Proxy, then select the Enable video proxy option. In the
Smart Proxy tab of the Preferences dialog box, you can set the condition when
proxy files need to be generated and choose a proxy file format. For more details
on the settings, see “Preferences” on page 40.

Once video proxy is enabled, proxy files will automatically be created and used in
your project whenever you insert video files into the Timeline.

Saving a video project

When you save a video project, it is saved as a DVP (Digital Video Project) file.
This is a small file that contains all of the information about your project, like which
clips to include, their position on the Timeline, and any transitions that you have
used. This file is not a movie and can only be opened in Video Editor. To save your
current project, select File: Save.

You can customize Video Editor to save backups of your project automatically by
selecting the Automatically save every option in the General tab of the
Preferences dialog box. Set a desired time interval between saves and the
maximum number of backups to keep.
28 VIDEO EDITOR

Capturing video
From within Video Editor, you can directly capture footage from your video camera
for editing. Alternatively, you can also use the separate Video Capture program
that is included with MediaStudio Pro.

In both the Video Editor and Video Capture programs, you will find three tools for
capturing footage in the Capture menu: Video Capture, Batch Capture, and
Scan DV Tape. Before you start capturing with these tools, make sure you have
your capture card installed in your computer and your video camera is connected
and switched on.

Video Capture
Video Capture allows you to capture a video clip at a time. The Video Capture
dialog box in Video Editor looks slightly different from the one in the Video Capture
program, but the capture settings are mostly the same.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 29

To capture a video sequence:

1. Select Capture: Video Capture.
2. If you have several video devices connected to your computer, select your
desired source device from the Capture device list.
3. Click Capture Options, then select Change Capture Plug-in from the pop-
menu.
The Change Capture Plug-in dialog box provides special plug-ins that enable
capturing footage from HDV, Sony MICROMV, and miniDV camcorders as well as
DVD and DVD-VR discs. You need to choose the proper plug-in to be able to
capture footage from such devices.
If you are capturing video as MPEG or WMV files, you also need to choose the
proper plug-in in this dialog box.
After you have selected a capture plug-in, click OK.
4. Check if the Capture format is set to the target file format that you want to
use for saving captured video files. If not, choose your desired file format from
the Capture format list.

If you are capturing TV footage via a TV capture card, choose your desired
TV channel as well.

5. In the Capture Settings tab, set your preferences for performing the capture:
• Capture method - Choose to auto capture with specified duration, auto
capture with no time limit, or manual capture. Select Auto naming to
save each captured segment as a separate file.
• Capture options - Specify the prefix file name and folder to use for
saving captured videos.
Click the Advanced tab to see more settings and customize them according to
your needs.
For details on all the capture settings in the Advanced tab, see “Capture Video
dialog box: Advanced tab” on page 215.
6. After customizing all capture settings, play your videotape and stop at the part
of the footage that you want to capture. If you have a DV or HDV source, you
can directly use the Navigation controls in the dialog box for playback.
7. Click Capture Video to start capturing.
8. If you specified a capture duration, wait for the capture to complete. Otherwise,
click Stop Capture or press [Esc] to stop capturing.
30 VIDEO EDITOR

Batch Capture
Batch Capture allows you to choose multiple video segments from your footage
and capture them all at once. You can use Batch Capture when capturing video
from DV and HDV sources.

Select Capture: Batch Capture to open a dialog box where you can play back
your footage, and at the same time, mark your desired video segments. The mark-
in and mark-out times of the video segments will be logged into a task list. After
you have finished marking, click the Capture Video button.

To save the task list for future use, click Save .

The Batch Capture dialog box in Video Editor is just the same as the one in the
Video Capture program. For more details on this dialog box, see “Batch capturing”
on page 226 under “Part II: Video Capture”.

Scan DV Tape
Scan DV Tape quickly scans an entire DV tape and automatically detects scenes
based on the recording date and time (that is, based on stops and starts of video
recordings).

To use this function, select Capture: Scan DV Tape. In the Scan DV Tape dialog
box, first choose how to perform the scan from the Scan/Capture method list,
then click Start to begin scanning the DV tape. As each scene is detected, a
thumbnail frame will be created and added to the list at the left side of the dialog
box. After the entire tape has been scanned, click Capture Video to capture the
detected scenes.

To save the scenes list and information for future use, click Save .

The Scan DV Tape dialog box in Video Editor is just the same as the one in the
Video Capture program. For more details on this dialog box, see “Scanning a DV
tape” on page 224 under “Part II: Video Capture”.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 31

Creating project segments in Smart

Compositor
The Smart Compositor in the Insert menu allows you to quickly compose
themed segments and use them in your project. This tool provides ready-made
theme templates that you can easily customize with your own video clips, titles,
audio clips, and effects.

Basically, you will only need to complete two stages in Smart Compositor before
inserting a movie segment into your project:

• First, select a template in the Theme Template tab.

1. Select a theme category from

this drop-down menu.

2. Click a thumbnail to 3. Use the Navigation buttons to

choose a template. preview the selected template.
32 VIDEO EDITOR

• Click Next to go to the Options tab. Here, choose which template elements
you want to replace or customize. These elements can be video clips, titles,
filters, audio, and more.

2. Use the Settings panel to customize the elements in a template. You can
replace clips, adjust overlay settings, and tweak filters and moving path
effects.

Trim
Bar

1. Expand the Tree 3. Click Save if you

View, then select 4. Click Insert to insert
want to save the customized
clips to be replaced your changes as
or effects to be template as a project
a new template. segment into the
customized.
Timeline.

The succeeding procedures explain how to customize the elements in a template in

greater detail.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 33

To replace the media clips:

1. First, make sure that your own clips have already been added to the Media
Library in the Production Library before opening Smart Compositor.
If you have not done so, you can still add them in Smart Compositor. In the

Options tab, click in the Media Library window then import your video

files. To import images, click .

2. Click on the small triangle icon next to the Media Clip item to expand its tree
view and to see the current clips in the template. The clips here may be video,
image or color clips.

These icons indicate that there are effects

applied to a clip. From left to right: Filter,
Overlay, Moving Path. Refer to the succeeding
procedures to know more on customizing
these effects.

3. Select a preset clip, for instance, Media Clip 1.

4. To replace the preset with your own clip, drag

your video or image file from the Media Library
and drop it onto the first thumbnail in the
Storyboard.
5. To append another clip, drag your video or image
file from the Media Library and drop it onto the
placeholder (that is, the black thumbnail) in the
Storyboard.
Repeat this step to append more video or image
clips.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to replace the other preset
media clips with your own video or image clips.

The clips that you add to the Storyboard will be fit into the length of the
original preset clip. If the length of your clips is longer than the preset,
your last appended clip will be trimmed to fit the original length.

The process for replacing audio clips is just the same as that of media clips.
34 VIDEO EDITOR

To trim a clip segment in the Storyboard:

1. Double-click the clip that you want to trim in the Storyboard.

2. Click to play back.

3. Click Pause when you reach the desired part, then click to set the mark-in
point.
4. Resume playback, then click Pause again when you reach the desired end point
and click to set the mark-out point.

5. Click to trim the clip.

To replace and customize the titles:

1. Click on the small triangle icon next to the Title item to expand its tree view
and to see the title clips in the template.
2. Select a default clip, for instance, Title Clip 1.
3. Type your text in the Title edit box, then change the font and text settings.
4. Use the Trim bar to adjust the title duration.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to replace the other default title clips with your own text.

To enable or disable filters:

1. Click on the small triangle icon next to the Filter item to expand its tree view
and to see the media clips that are applied with filters.
2. Select a clip, for instance, Filter Clip 1.
3. Select Remove Filter to disable the filter. Clear this checkbox to enable the
filter.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enable or disable filters in the other clips.

To customize overlay clips:

1. Click on the small triangle icon next to the Overlay item to expand its tree view
and to see the overlay clips that are in the template.
2. Select a clip, for instance, Overlay Clip 1.
3. From the Type drop-down list, select Blue Key if the overlay clip has a
bluescreen. On the Preview Window in Smart Compositor, click on the
bluescreen to make it transparent.
Otherwise, choose from the other overlay key types in the drop-down list. See
“Overlay key types” on page 111 for details.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 35

4. If the background of the overlay clip is not removed completely, increase the
Similarity value until the background is totally transparent.
5. For a smoother overlay effect, apply a soft edge.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to customize the other overlay clips in the template.

To customize moving path effects:

1. Click on the small triangle icon next to the Moving Path item to expand its tree
view and to see the media clips that have moving path effects.
2. Select a clip, for instance, Moving Path Clip 1.
3. To resize the clip dimensions, change the width and height settings.
4. Specify the initial clip position before the moving path effect starts by setting
the X and Y coordinates.
5. Specify the degree of Rotation for the clip.
6. You can also apply a soft edge and add a surrounding border to the clip.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to customize moving path effects for the other clips in the
template.

After creating the project segment in Smart Compositor:

When you have completed your work and clicked OK in Smart Compositor, insert
the piece you created into your project. It will be inserted as a virtual clip on the
Timeline.

For details on how to edit virtual clips, see “Working with virtual clips” on page 57.
36 VIDEO EDITOR

Using the Production Library

Video Editor's Production Library
stores everything you need to
create your movie. It has two parts
- the Production Library and
Project Tray tabs.

When you start a project, the

Production Library tab already
contains all of the transitions,
filters, and other special effects
that come with Video Editor.
Whereas the Project Tray tab is
your organizer - it is ready to be
filled with the various clips that
you will use in your current
project. In both tabs, clips are
categorized by subject and Production Library (Transition Effects Gallery).
represented by small thumbnail Effect and filter thumbnails with are the
pictures. ones that can be played back in real-time.

If the Production Library is not yet

open in the program, select
Window: Production Library or
click on the Panel Manager to
open it.

Placing clips into the Production Library

To share clips among different projects, import them to the Media Library folder
of the Production Library tab. To use clips only in a particular project, import
them to the Media Pool folder of the Project Tray tab.

To import media files into the Production Library:

1. Click either the Import Video File, Import Audio File, Import Image File,
or Import Project File button from the toolbar.
2. Browse for and select your file. Click Open to import the file.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 37

You can also add files to the Production Library when you click File: Create to
generate video or audio files. You can add effects or filters to the Production
Library while creating them.

To add title, color and silence clips from the Timeline to the Production Library,
drag them to the Production Library’s Media Library folder or to the Project Tray’s
Media Pool folder.

If you want to create new folders, right-click on the Media Library or Media
Pool folder and select Create.

Using the Storyboard

The Project Tray’s Storyboard folder allows you to arrange your images or video
clips before inserting them into the Timeline.

To use the Storyboard function:

1. Click the Project Tray tab, then

open the Storyboard folder.
2. Import or copy images or video
files (from other folders inside the
Production Library) you want to
use into the Storyboard folder.
3. Arrange the sequence of the
images or video clips by dragging
them to the desired positions.
4. Select all the images or video files,
then right-click and select Add to
Storyboard
Timeline.
folder
5. In the Add to Timeline dialog
box, determine the layout option
for your clips.
To be able to apply transitions
between clips, select Overlap.
6. If you have images, set their duration.
38 VIDEO EDITOR

7. Choose a transition effect to apply. Either select Random, or select Customize

then click Select to choose your desired transition effect. Also specify the
Transition effect duration.
8. Select Use default pan and zoom filter, then either select Random or select
Customize then click Select to choose your desired effect.

• Select Apply auto audio cross fade to automatically apply a fade in/
fade out audio effect between overlapping video clips.
• Select Clear clips from the Storyboard folder to remove the files from
the Storyboard folder after inserting them into the Timeline.

9. Click OK.
10.Place the hand cursor over the Video track position on the Timeline where you
want to place the images or video clips then click the mouse button.

Hand cursor over the Video track position

Nested timelines
When you create nested timelines in your project, they are automatically added to
the Timeline folder in the Project Tray tab. You can drag the timelines in this
folder to other parts of your project. For details on nested timelines, see “Creating
nested timelines” on page 56.

Working with folders

When you view the Production Library, the contents of the currently selected
gallery appear on the right side of the Production Library window. To the left are
folders which organize the various thumbnails of the particular gallery. You can
manage these folders by right-clicking on them and choosing a command from the
pop-up menu that appears. This menu offers commands for creating, renaming,
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 39

deleting and copying folders. You can also save the contents of a folder as a gallery
file as well as load the contents from a previously saved gallery file.

To see all the contents of the folders (including subfolders) in a particular

library, click All in the selected library's folder tree.

Drag and drop

The mouse is a powerful tool in Video Editor. You will find that it is effortless to
drag and drop clips among many parts of the program. Try dragging a clip from
Windows Explorer to the Production Library to organize your project. Then drag
the clip's thumbnail from the Production Library to the Source Window to do a little
trimming. Finally, drag the clip from the Source Window directly to the Timeline for
insertion into your movie.

Viewing Production Library thumbnails

Click in the Production Library Toolbar to open a pop-up menu where you
can choose whether to display clips in Thumbnail, Description, or List View.

The Menu button opens a pop-up menu that provides additional commands for
viewing the properties of a selected thumbnail, as well as editing, deleting, and
customizing the Production Library preferences (this menu can also be accessed by
right-clicking on a thumbnail).

When customizing the preferences, you can choose to control the size of the
thumbnails as well as to display or hide the name below each of the thumbnails. If
you want to maximize the space available for displaying thumbnails, clear the
Show border option.

The Search command allows you to search for particular thumbnails, while the
Sort command allows you to arrange them based on their name, description,
annotation, or date and time.

Adding effects to the Production Library

In the Production Library, you can edit any clip or effect without having to first
insert it into the Timeline. This is a great way to define and save unique attributes
for clips and effects and allows you to expand and customize the Production
Library indefinitely.
40 VIDEO EDITOR

To modify and add an effect:

1. Select the thumbnail.
2. Right-click the thumbnail and click the Edit command on the pop-up menu.
3. Specify the attributes in the dialog box for that thumbnail.
4. Click the Add button. Enter a name below the thumbnail and click OK.

Preferences
The Preferences dialog box (double–click the Status Bar or click File:
Preferences [F6]) provides options for customizing certain aspects of Video
Editor’s behavior. Understanding these options will improve the way you work as
well as help optimize Video Editor for each project.

Preferences dialog box: General tab

• Enable undo specifies the maximum levels of undo/redo allowed by Video Editor (up
to 99). As Video Editor allocates more memory for each level of undo/redo, you may
find that too high a level adversely affects performance. In such cases, restrict the
level to 3-4 only. You can, of course, choose not to have undo/redo to maximize
performance, but any editing done will be final.

• Number of recently opened files specifies how many file names are stored in the
Recent History list found on the File menu.

• Return to the first frame after playing returns any sequence in the Source and
Preview windows to the first frame after it has been played (like a CD player). When
left cleared, the sequence stops on the last frame in the sequence after playing (like
coming to the end of a tape in a VCR).

• Use temporary file when creating 8-bit optimized palettes uses a temporary
file whenever you create an optimized palette for Indexed-Color video. This option
speeds up the creation process significantly and should be selected whenever you
plan on creating Indexed-Color video files.

• Display Options dialog box opens the Options dialog box for any video filter,
transition effect, audio filter, or moving path dropped directly into the Timeline from
the Production Library.

• Display data rate warning message halts the creation process of any video file
once it exceeds the specified data rate. Leave this cleared if the data rate is not
important or you are creating video files unattended and do not want the creation
process to be stopped.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 41

• Display New dialog box opens the New dialog box whenever the New button or
File: New command is clicked. If left cleared, any new video project is automatically
created based on the attributes of the current project. If you often create video
projects using the same attributes then leave this option clear.

• Automatically save every automatically saves the video project at the time
interval specified. In the event of the program crash, you will be presented with an
option to restore the latest backup when you restart the program. You can specify an
auto-save time interval and the number of backups to keep.

• Default background color sets the color for any color clips.

• Title safe area margin specifies the margin percentage for displaying any titles in a
video project. This is useful if you intend on sending your video back out to video
tape or for broadcasting, as television has a different resolution than a computer
monitor, and edges which are viewable on screen may disappear. As a guideline, for
NTSC devices choose 12%, for PAL 10%.

• Default inserted clip duration determines the duration of Image File, Title Clip,
Color Clip and Silence Clip being placed in the Timeline. Specify a number from 1
to 9999 frames.

• Check Ulead's Web site at start of every _ day(s) automatically checks Ulead
Web site at a specified number of days interval for product news and updates.

• Temporary folder defines the folder that Video Editor uses as a temporary
workspace for compiling, compressing, or decompressing files. By assigning a
temporary folder for these types of operations you prevent Video Editor from using
the default hard drive folder. This will minimize the chances of Video Editor
interfering with other processes your computer may be running in the background.

• Display DV timecode on Source Window allows the DV timecode to be shown in

Video Editor's Source Window. (You need a VMR-compatible display card to use this
option).

• Default number of tracks specifies the number of video/audio tracks populating

the Timeline upon a new project creation. The maximum supported number of tracks
is 99.

Preferences dialog box: Edit tab

• Apply color filter allows you to control how colors are displayed in Video Editor,
based on the NTSC or PAL color models. Select the appropriate option if you plan on
having your video played back over an NTSC or PAL device such as a television. If
you are designing for monitor display only, leave this option clear.

• Double-click on video track to insert determines whether to open the Insert

Video File dialog box or the Insert Image File dialog box whenever you double-click
on an empty portion of a video track.
42 VIDEO EDITOR

• Resample quality allows you to set the quality of any video data resampling. Best
quality results in better video reproduction, but takes longer to render. Good quality
will give you faster previews. If you are preparing for final output and are using the
original source files, select Best.

• Apply auto audio cross-fade automatically applies a fade in/fade out audio effect
between overlapping clips.

• Auto cross-fade resampling lets you choose the audio fading algorithm to be used
for audio cross-fade. Logarithmic requires longer processing time but produces
smoother audio fading than Linear.

• Default field order option sets the default field options for the selected video clips
whose field options are unknown. Field-based video stores video data as two distinct
fields of information for each frame. If your video is only for computer playback,
select Frame-based.

• Default display aspect ratio sets the default display aspect ratio for the selected
video clips whose display aspect ratio is unknown.

• Default stretch mode sets how you want your video to be displayed in the Preview
Window. Select Stretch to extend your video to fill out the entire frame without
keeping the aspect ratio. Keep aspect ratio (with letterbox) fits the entire video
into the Preview Window while Keep aspect ratio (no letterbox) keeps the video
proportioned and crops the areas that exceeds the Preview Window.

• Default transition effect sets a default transition effect for video clips. When two
clips in the same track overlap, a default transition clip will be automatically added to
the overlapped region.

• Save image deinterlace allows you to save image files and at the same time
eliminates the blinking effect from images derived from interlaced video output.

• Append project as lets you choose how to insert an existing Video Editor project file
into the Timeline. Select Virtual clip if you want to insert it as a single clip just like
any normal media clip. Select Part of current project if you want to insert the
complete content of the project file into the Timeline.

Preferences dialog box: Associate tab

• File type specifies the type of file (such as AVI or WAV) you want to associate with a
program.

• Associated program indicates the program to open whenever the Edit: Open in
Associated Program command is selected.

• Include trim information allows a video clip opened in the associated program to
display any marked portions that you have created in Video Editor.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 43

Preferences dialog box: Preview tab

• Specify additional folders for preview files indicates which folder Video Editor
can use to save preview files. Specify other folders if you have additional drives or a
partitioned drive. If you only have one drive, leave the other boxes empty.

• Hard disk displays how much free space you have left on your hard drive.

• Limit hard disk usage to specifies how much memory you want to allocate just for
Video Editor’s purposes. If you are only using Video Editor and want to optimize
performance, select the maximum amount possible. If you are using other programs
in the background, you may want to limit this to about half. If left clear, Video Editor
uses your system's memory management to control the use and distribution of
memory.

Preferences dialog box: Smart Proxy tab

• Enable video proxy automatically creates proxy files whenever a video source file is
inserted into the Timeline.

• Create proxy when video size is (or above) allows you to set the condition as to
when proxy files will be generated. If the frame size of a video source file is the same
as or is higher than the chosen frame size here, a proxy file will be created for the
video file.

• Proxy folder sets the folder location to store proxy files.

• Video proxy options indicate the settings to be used in generating proxy files. To
change the proxy file format or other settings, click Template to choose a template
that already contains predefined settings, or click Options to tweak detailed
settings.
44 VIDEO EDITOR
 2

WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE

While organizing your media clips in the Production Library is a necessary first
step, the real work occurs on the Timeline. As the name implies, the Timeline
is a chronological workspace that allows you to visually lay out your clips,
transitions, and overlays.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Inserting clips
Working with tracks
Creating nested timelines
Working with virtual clips
46 VIDEO EDITOR

Inserting clips
Clips are the objects that make up your movie. A clip can be an image, a video, a
transition, a title, a background color, or an audio file. Following insertion into the
Timeline, clips can be trimmed and special effects can be applied without
modifying the original source files. This is designed to give you greater confidence
in editing your video. To start work on a video project, you need to first insert clips
into the Timeline. Once inserted, you can begin to edit and arrange them into your
final video production.

Inserting video, audio and image clips

The easiest way to insert a video, audio, or image clip into the Timeline is to click
the appropriate Insert button on the Timeline Toolbar. You can also choose its
corresponding command from the Insert menu or the right-click pop-up menu. A
dialog box opens allowing you to select a file that Video Editor supports. Supported
formats include MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, DV type 1 & 2 AVI, as well as
QuickTime and Flash files.

Double-clicking an empty time portion of a video track opens either the Insert
Video or Insert Image File dialog box depending on the settings in the Edit
tab of the File: Preferences dialog box.

If you choose a video file that contains both video and audio data, the clips are
placed in both the video and audio tracks: these clips remain connected to
maintain synchronicity. (You can separate them by clicking the Clip: Split
command.) Clips already in the Production Library can simply be dragged onto the
Timeline. You can also drag-and-drop clips directly from Windows Explorer.

The files you insert should match the properties of your video project to
ensure the best possible output results.

When you insert clips, they are placed at the position of your pointer. How inserted
clips affect any neighboring clips is determined by the Ripple Editing mode. If
you are in Ripple Editing mode, you can insert the clip anywhere you like on a
compatible track (even over existing clips) and the clip pushes along any other
clips which appear in the same track. If you are not in Ripple Editing mode, you
can only insert the clip into an empty clip slot. An empty clip slot starts from the
 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE 47

end of one clip and continues to the beginning of the next. (See “Ripple Editing” on
page 82 for details).

Extracting extra audio tracks

In the Insert Video File dialog box, the Tracks button allows you to extract audio
files from a video that contains multiple audio clips. With this feature, you can
extract any or all the audio clips and insert them on the various audio tracks on the
Timeline.

To extract an audio track:

1. Select Insert: Video File.
2. Select the file containing the audio
clip for extraction.
3. Click Tracks. The Extract Extra
Audio Tracks dialog box will
appear.
4. A list of all available tracks will
appear in the Audio Tracks
window. Select the file you want
to extract by clicking on it.
5. Determine the file name, audio
file type, and other options.
6. Click OK.

If the selected file has only one audio track, the Tracks button is disabled.
Click the Play button to listen to the track you have selected.

Inserting voiceover
In the case of documentaries and presentation videos, narration often helps
viewers understand and appreciate the movie’s content. Video Editor’s voiceover
function allows you to incorporate narration and voiceovers into your videos using
the following procedure.

To insert a voice over:

1. Use the Preview bar to determine the section of the video where you want to
add your narration.
48 VIDEO EDITOR

Make sure the Project cursor is not over an existing audio clip on the
selected Audio track.

2. Select Insert: Voice File.

3. In the Insert Voice File dialog box, test the sensitivity of the microphone by
looking at the level meter.

You can adjust the recording level of the microphone by going into the
Windows Volume Control.

4. Under Audio track selection, choose the audio track where to insert the
voiceover.
5. Under Select audio file folder, click the ellipsis button to choose a folder
where to save the voiceover file.

Click Run Mixer to adjust the recording volume and other recording
options.

6. Click Start to begin recording your voice. Press [ESC] to stop recording.
 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE 49

Inserting title, color, and silence clips

Apart from video, audio, voice over, and image clips, you can also insert title, color,
and silence clips into the Timeline. Title clips are often used in conjunction with
moving path effects (they are described in detail in Chapter 4). Silence and color
clips can be used as placeholder clips which can ‘stand in’ for other clips you want
to insert later. For example, you may want to start working on a video project, but
you have yet to acquire all your source files or some may still be in the editing
stage. You can use a color clip to substitute for an image or video clip and a silence
clip for an audio clip that will serve as default clips. When it is time to utilize your
finished source files, use the Clip: Replace With command to insert these files
into the positions that the default clips occupy. Any existing filters, special effects,
and/or moving paths are retained by the new clip.

You can also use color clips as a background for other clips in the project, such as
when performing fades or to create certain types of effects. You can set key frames
to create impressive gradient effects with each frame of the clip gradually shifting
from one color to the next.

To insert a color clip:

1. Click the Insert Color Clip button in the Timeline Toolbar (You can also click
Insert: Color Clip or right-click on a video track and select Color Clip from the
pop-up menu.)
2. In the Insert Color Clip dialog box, specify the duration of the clip in the
Duration spin box.
3. Choose the color of the clip by clicking the color square or entering RGB values.
Click the Pure Color button to quickly insert a solid color clip.
4. Click OK. Drop the clip into position on a video track.

If you choose different colors for the start and end key frames, you can create a
gradient effect, such as a fade from black to white. The more key frames you add,
the greater the variety of colors you can have. For more on adding key frames, see
“Using key frame controls in dialog boxes” on page 103.

Inserting Ulead video file types

MediaStudio Pro supports a number of proprietary file formats for use with the
MediaStudio Pro suite of programs. These are Ulead Image Sequence (*.UIS),
Ulead CG Infinity (*.UCG) and Ulead Video Paint (*.UVP). You can insert these
files into the Timeline whenever you open the Insert Video File dialog box and
50 VIDEO EDITOR

choose their respective file types from the Files of type list. It is always best to
insert the actual project files for any projects you have created in one of these
other programs as they have not been rendered or compressed in any way and
thus maintain the highest quality.

Ulead CG Infinity and Video Paint files are not supported in the MediaStudio
Pro Standard Edition.

Inserting UIS files

The UIS file type is a special format that allows you to select a sequence of images
to be loaded into a video project with the Insert Video File command. These
images can be from any source, such as animation Targa files or even a hand
drawn series of images created in a drawing program. The only restriction is that
these files must have consecutively numbered file names, such as vid0001.tga,
vid0002.tga, vid0003.tga and so on.

Any image sequence can easily be converted to a UIS by using the File:
Convert command.

Inserting soundtracks from third-party music

Video Editor’s Auto Music feature lets you easily create composer-quality
soundtracks from royalty-free music and use them as background music in your
project. You can have different tempos or musical instrument variations per music.

Auto Music Maker utilizes the patented SmartSound Quicktracks technology in

soundtrack creation and features a variety of SmartSound royalty-free music.

To create soundtracks using Auto Music:

1. Select Insert: Auto Music.
2. To choose from the royalty-free music library that’s supplied with Video Editor,
select Owned from the Scope menu, then choose the music that you want
from the Music list.

To view the complete selection of SmartSound libraries, select All from the
Scope menu. When you choose a music that is not supplied with Video
Editor, it will be downloaded for preview only. You need to purchase the
music if you want to use it.
 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE 51

3. Select a Variation of the selected music. Click Play to listen to the music with
the variation applied.
4. Set the Duration for the music. Alternatively, select Fit to project length to
make the music clip the same length as your project.
5. Click OK, then insert the music into an audio track in the Timeline.

Inserting Video Editor projects

You can insert another Video Editor project (.DVP) file into the current project by
clicking Insert: Project File, or by dragging a project file from the Production
Library or Windows Explorer and dropping it into the Timeline.

Before insertion, you can choose first how DVP projects will be inserted into the
Timeline through the Edit tab of the Preferences dialog box.

By default, a DVP project will be inserted as a Virtual clip. That is, all the media
files, transitions and effects in it will be combined as a single clip and placed at the
insertion point in the Main Timeline. Once the virtual clip has been placed in the
timeline, you can treat it as any other ordinary video clip. For details on what
operations can be applied to virtual clips, see “Working with virtual clips” on
page 57.

If you prefer to have the DVP project expanded on the timeline, select Part of
current project from the Append project as drop-down menu. In this case, all
of the media clips, transitions, and effects contained in it will be completely placed
at the insertion point in the Main Timeline and you can replace or edit them.

Push Away insertion

Push Away insertion is related to Ripple Editing and controls how inserted clips
affect other clips in the Timeline. You must be in No Ripple mode for this to work
and it only works on a single track. The key to this technique is to press [SHIFT]
while inserting clips.

To use Push Away insertion:

1. Click the No Ripple button, then click the Insert Video File button in the
Timeline Toolbar.
2. In the Insert Video File dialog box, select a clip (click it once) then click Open.
3. While you press (and hold) the [SHIFT] key, place your clip in a video track.

Push Away insertion also works on clips that are being dragged from one location
to another or that are being pasted into the Timeline.
52 VIDEO EDITOR

Working with tracks

The Timeline consists of two types of tracks - video and audio. There is one
primary video track, while the others are overlay tracks. (For details on overlay
tracks, see “Overlay” on page 109).

Single-track editing
Single-track editing means that clips and transitions share the same video track.
When you insert and overlap two video clips on a video track, a default transition
(as defined in the Preferences dialog box) will automatically be applied to the
overlapping section. If you want to apply your own transition, you can overlap
video clips, then drag a transition from the Production Library and drop it onto the
overlapping segment of the clips.

Adding or deleting tracks

Depending on the scale of your project, you can add or remove tracks in the
Timeline. To do so, right-click on the leftmost area of a track to open a menu. You
can then choose whether to add or remove the current track, or to add or remove
multiple tracks.

When you have more tracks available that can fit on the screen at one time,
you can use the scroll bars to move up and down through the tracks. To lock
both the video and audio tracks when scrolling, click the Scroll Lock button
at the top of the vertical scroll bar or the View: Scroll Lock command. The
next time you scroll, both tracks move in unison.

The Track buttons

Track name button

When this button is pressed down, all the clips on the track
are selected.
Track name button

Lock or Unlock track button

When a track is locked, the clips cannot be moved or edited. You can lock
individual clips by first selecting a clip and then select Edit: Lock.
 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE 53

Solo button
When pressed down, only the current track will be included in the preview or
rendered file and all other tracks will be disabled.

Hide button
When pressed down, the current track will be hidden and not included in the
preview or rendered file.

Determining the visibility of clips

Often you will have a number of clips that will be playing at the same time in a
project. It is common, for example, to have one main clip in Video1 and a second
clip with titles in Video2. Clips that are in the upper tracks in the Timeline will
always play over (on top of) clips located in lower tracks. Since Video2 is higher in
the Timeline than Video1, it will play over Video1.

Displaying clips on the Timeline

Click the Display Mode button on the Timeline Toolbar (or click View:
Timeline Display Mode) to choose how clips are displayed: Filmstrip,
Waveform, Thumbnail, or Filename modes.

Filmstrip and Waveform modes display clips graphically (video clips as frames,
audio clips as waveforms) allowing you to see the entire contents of a clip. While
the graphic modes may be easier to work with, it takes time for your computer to
redraw clips every time they have been modified. To help improve performance,
but still retain some visual cues as to the contents of a clip, select the Thumbnail
mode (video only). This shows the first and last frames of a video clip separated by
the file name of the clip. The last mode, File name, represents clips by their file
names only with no graphical information. This is the fastest mode as it is the
quickest to display, but offers no visual reference to the clip’s contents.

Underneath the timecode ruler in the Timeline Window, you can show a project cue
bar which is useful for marking areas on a project for future edits, or show a
chapter point cue bar if you will be marking chapter points for a DVD project. A cue
bar can also be displayed underneath each video and audio track for placing clip
cues.
54 VIDEO EDITOR

Moreover, you can set the size of video and audio clips in the tracks. Changing the
size of clips is especially useful if you are running in a high resolution display mode
and find it hard to identify clips and their contents.

Zooming in/out of the Timeline

The Timeline can represent your project at any magnification. You can display
every frame in a clip or view the entire project on the screen at one time. This
zooming is achieved by changing the time measurement unit used in the Timeline.
For example, at 1 second (the default) each division on the Timeline represents 30
frames (using the NTSC standard), and at 1 minute each division represents 1,800
frames, and so on. To change the unit of measurement you have two options:

• Select View: Ruler Unit to open a submenu and choose the preferred time unit
to do your editing. You can also select Zoom In/Out, single Frame, Fit In
Window, or Previous Zoom to toggle between the previous zoom ratio and the
current one.

• Drag the Timeline Zoom slider to the left to zoom out or to the
right to zoom in. Alternatively, click the Zoom Out or Zoom In
button that is above the slider.

• Click the Zoom tool and then click on the Timeline. Each
mouse click zooms in one ruler unit (toward displaying each frame). Holding
down the [SHIFT] key as you click zooms out one ruler unit (toward Fit in
Window). This method is best if you are zooming in on a particular clip or frame
and want it to remain in view at all times. You can also use the "+" and "-" keys
found on the keyboard to zoom in and out.

Press and hold the [Z] key on your keyboard to temporarily switch to the
Zoom tool. The [SHIFT+Z] allows you to zoom out.

General Timeline and Summary Timeline

Video Editor provides two types of timeline views: General Timeline and
Summary Timeline.
 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE 55

General Timeline provides the traditional linear style for all timecodes
and tracks. This means that your clips are displayed in their real time
showing their actual length. This may cause some clips in your project
not to be visible in the Timeline window all at the same time. You may
need to use the scroll bar to view desired clips. You may also adjust the
Ruler Unit while editing in the General Timeline mode to select short clips
and to see all the clips in your project.

In the Summary Timeline mode, you get an overall picture of the

whole project similar to a storyboard. Clips are displayed in similar
thumbnail sizes regardless of the clip's actual time length making it
easier to select it. The number of thumbnails you will see will depend on
the number of segments your project has. The numbers on the
illustration below display an example of what segments are in a project
Timeline.

You can toggle between these two modes by clicking the corresponding
button or selecting the mode from the Window menu.

General Timeline

Summary Timeline
56 VIDEO EDITOR

Creating nested timelines

Having just one timeline in the workspace usually is enough for a simple editing
job. But what if you have multiple projects in production, or you need to include
multiple sets of independent files for ongoing editing? The answer is to have
nested timelines in your project. To create a nested timeline, right-click on the
Main Timeline tab to open a pop-up menu, then select Create New Timeline.

A blank new Timeline1 will be created and becomes active in the workspace.

When you create several nested timelines, each will be numbered sequentially
(Timeline1, Timeline2, Timeline3...).

Inserting nested timelines

After you are done editing in a nested timeline, you can insert it into your main
project timeline. Video Editor will wrap the whole timeline as a single virtual clip
and insert it into the Main Timeline.

To insert a nested timeline into the Main Timeline, you can:

• While in the main project timeline, right-click on the Main Timeline tab. In the
pop-up menu that opens, click Insert from Timeline, then select the nested
timeline that you want to insert into the Main Timeline.
• While in a nested timeline, for instance Timeline1, right-click on its tab. In the
pop-up menu that opens, select Add to Timeline: Main Timeline.

At most, you can have up to two levels of nested timelines. For instance, the Main
Timeline can be inserted with Timeline1, and Timeline1 can be inserted with
Timeline2. Timeline2 cannot be further inserted with Timeline3.

Everytime you create a nested timeline, it will be stored in the Timeline folder of
the Project Tray tab. If you want to insert a duplicate of this nested timeline,
simply drag it from the Timeline folder and place it in the desired part of your
project.
 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH THE TIMELINE 57

Editing a timeline
Double-click a virtual clip in the Main Timeline to edit its contents. This will create
a new Timeline tab, showing the media clips and effects expanded in the
workspace. After you have finished your edits, all of the changes will be
automatically updated into the virtual clip in the Main Timeline.

Double-clicking the virtual clip, Timeline1, will open a new Timeline tab for you to edit its
contents.

To delete a specific timeline, set it active then right-click on its tab to open a
pop-up menu. Select Close Timeline from the menu.

Working with virtual clips

Virtual clips have the same editing attributes as ordinary video clips. All tools
applicable to video clips can be used with virtual clips, such as trimming and Ripple
modes.

You can also apply video and audio filters, moving paths, freeze frame, speed,
reverse, color calibration, overlay options, and other features. The only limitation
is the unavailability of the Split by Scene function in the Clip menu when working
with virtual clips.
58 VIDEO EDITOR

Audio attributes in a virtual clip (such as audio filters, speed and reverse) can be
added, modified, or deleted. You can adjust its sound volume just like in audio
clips.

Viewing virtual clips in the Source Window

Just like video clips, you can view virtual clips in the Source Window.

To view a virtual clip in the Source Window, you can:

• Double-click a virtual clip on the Timeline,
• Drag and drop the virtual clip from the timeline onto the Source Window,
• Load a DVP project file by using the Import command from the Source
Window Menu.

After you have successfully loaded a virtual clip into the Source Window, you can
set mark-in/mark-out points, add cues, play a preview range, and apply many
other operations to the virtual clip through the Source Window.

Unlike normal video clips, however, there are some limitations when working with
virtual clips in the Source Window:

• Shuttle playback is not supported.

• The Export Video submenu is disabled.
• The VU-Meter is not available.

Adding virtual clips to the Production Library

Apart from viewing virtual clips in the Source Window, you can load them into the
Production Library.

To import a virtual clip into Production Library, you can:

• Drag and drop a virtual clip from the timeline or Source Window into the
Production Library or Project Tray.
• Drag and drop a DVP project file from Windows Explorer. Alternatively, click
Import Project File on the Production Library Toolbar or right-click and select
Import Project File in the pop-up menu, then choose a DVP project file to
import.

Working with virtual clips in the Production Library is similar to normal video/
audio clip operations. The only limitation is the unavailability of the Split by
Scene function in the right-click pop-up menu.
 3

EDITING

Frame accurate editing and drag-and-drop simplicity is what digital video is all
about. This is the heart of Video Editor.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Making selections in the Timeline

Working with clips
Working with cues
Locating clips
Trimming clips
Multi-trim Video
Split by Scene
Ripple Editing
Using the Source Window
Previewing your work
60 VIDEO EDITOR

Making selections in the Timeline

In order to edit clips, you must first select them. This can be as easy as clicking on
a clip, but more advanced techniques can be very useful. There are two types of
selections that you can make: clip-based and time-based. Clip-based
selections are horizontal, moving left, and right across tracks, whereas time-
based selections are vertical, encompassing all clips in all tracks within the
selected duration. You can make selections in Video Editor using either the Clip or
Time Selection tools.

Using the Clip Selection Tool

The Clip Selection Tool allows you to select clips in any of the tracks in the
Timeline. You can select individual clips by clicking them. Once you have selected a
clip, you can move it or drag on its borders to trim the clip.

To select all the clips in a particular track, click the Track button on the left side of
the track. To select all the clips in the Timeline, select Edit: Select: All [CTRL+L].

To select multiple clips:

1. Select the Clip Selection tool.
2. Press and hold the [SHIFT] key on your keyboard.
3. Click and drag in the Video or Audio (but not both) Timeline to make a
selection.
4. Any clips included (in whole or in part) in the selection area will be selected
when you release the mouse button.

This is the original Timeline. The selection area is shaded above. It was
created while holding the [CTRL+SHIFT]
keys and extends across multiple video
tracks. Note that the audio clip in Audio1 is
not selected.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 61

• The corresponding audio is automatically selected for video clips that have
audio.
• Hold down the [CTRL+SHIFT] keys while creating a selection area to also
select any audio clips on the related audio tracks. For example, when
selecting a video clip on Video1, any audio clip on Audio1 will also be
selected.

Using the Time Selection Tool

The Time Selection Tool allows you to select a period of time, including any clips
(or portions of clips) that occur within that time period.

To perform a time selection:

1. Select the Time Selection Tool. The pointer now has a Timeline icon
under it when placed over the Timeline.
2. Drag your mouse over the area of the Timeline you want to select.

If you need to select a period of time more precisely, you can manually enter the
exact location by selecting the Time Selection Tool, and then selecting Edit:
Time Selection. Choosing this command opens the Time Selection dialog box
where you can specify the duration. The Mark-in time corresponds to the start of
the selection area and the Mark-out time the end of the selection area. Click OK
to automatically create a selection marquee over the specified area of the
Timeline.

Using the Track Selection Tool

The Track Selection Tool is useful when you want to select entire tracks or parts of
tracks.

To select a track or part of a track with the Track Selection tool:

1. Click the Track Selection Tool on the Timeline Toolbar.
2. Click on a clip. The clip, along with the rest of the track to the right of the clip, is
selected. Therefore, if you click on the first clip in a track you will then select the
entire track.

If you press [SHIFT] while clicking on a clip, you will select all clips in all of
the tracks in the Timeline to the right of the clip.
62 VIDEO EDITOR

Using the Track buttons

Enable or Disable track button

When this is disabled, the track will not show up in a preview. That is, it is
temporarily hidden. By default it is enabled.

Lock or Unlock track button

When a track is locked, the clips cannot be moved or edited. You can lock
individual clips by first selecting a clip and then select Edit: Lock or Clip: Locked.

Solo button

When this button is pressed down, all the video/audio tracks on the Timeline are
turned off except for the one which solo button is pressed down. The track
becomes the only one activated or simply, solo.

Grouping clips
As your project becomes more and more complex, it may be useful to group some
clips together so that they may be moved around as a unit.

To group clips:
1. Select the clips by pressing [SHIFT] while dragging over clips to be included.
2. Click Edit: Group (to ungroup click Edit: Ungroup).
Additional clips can be added to the group by selecting the group and then the new
clip. Different groups of clips can also be grouped into a higher level group, that is,
groups of clips can be grouped together. If you want to separate some clips from a
multi-level group, you need to ungroup at each level until you reach the level
where the clips are.

All actions performed to any grouped clip will affect all of the clips in the
group.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 63

Working with clips

Clips, whether audio, video, images or effects, are the foundation of your project
and manipulating them is the most important skill you can master. The next few
pages cover the basics: cutting, copying, pasting, and trimming.

To cut or copy a selected clip (to the Clipboard), you can:

• Click either the Cut or Copy button on the Standard Toolbar.
• Select either the Edit: Cut or Copy command.
• Hold down [Ctrl] and drag the clip to a different location.
• Use the keyboard shortcuts: Cut [Ctrl+X] or Copy [Ctrl+C].
• Right-click the clip and select Cut or Copy from the pop-up menu.

Cutting a clip removes it from its original location, and pasting transfers it to
your designated location. Copying leaves the original clip in place, and pasting
then effectively duplicates it. You can use the Cut and Copy commands to
transfer a clip to a different project. The Production Library contains copies of
your clips. You can drag a clip from the Production Library to the Timeline as
many times as you need to.

To paste a clip (from the Clipboard), you can:

• Click the Paste button.
• From the Edit menu, select Paste [Ctrl+V].

After performing one of the above actions you will have to click on the location
where you want to paste the clip.

Pasting attributes
Sometimes you may want to paste only the attributes (Video Filters, Audio Filters,
Overlay Options, and Moving Paths) of one clip to another. This is a very powerful
technique that allows you to maintain perfect consistency between clips.

To paste the attributes of a clip only:

1. Select the clip.
2. Right-click the clip (or use the Edit: Paste Attributes command).
3. From the drop-down menu, select Paste Attributes.
64 VIDEO EDITOR

This will open the Paste Attributes dialog box which allows you to select
individual attributes to paste. When pasting filters, there are two additional
options: Append and Replace. Append adds the new filters to any existing filters
and Replace overwrites any existing filters with those from the pasted clip.

To clear (remove) a clip from the Timeline:

1. Select a clip (or a period of time) on the Timeline.
2. Click Edit: Clear [Delete] or right-click the selected clip and click Clear.

• This does not affect the source files in any way.

• If clearing a period of time, any clips that are included in the time selection
are removed. (Clips partially selected are trimmed to the selection
boundary.)

• If you do not want to create an empty clip or time slot, make sure that the
Single-Track or Multi-Track Ripple Editing button on the Timeline
Toolbar is selected (see “Ripple Editing” on page 82). The next time you use
the Clear command any following clips will move backward to the left to
occupy the vacated space.

Aligning clips
Snapping helps to align clips precisely and effortlessly. Select Edit: Snap to make
clips snap to the Vertical Preview Line, edge of other clips, transitions, and even
project cues (for more on cues, see “Working with cues” on page 71).

Splitting the audio from video clips

Video clips commonly also have audio. In the Timeline, the accompanying audio
clip is placed into the corresponding audio track (Video1 with Audio1, Video2 with
Audio2) and the two clips are locked together as a unit. To delete or move either of
the clips separately, the two must first be split. This is useful when you are
creating a music video and the audio track is not needed. You will also need to split
the audio from a video clip in order to perform a freeze frame effect (see
“Freezing a frame” on page 68).

To split the audio from video clips:

1. Select the clip.
2. Click Clip: Split (or right-click a selected clip and, from the pop-up menu,
select Split).
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 65

To reunite clips, select Unite. For the two clips to be successfully reunited
they need to be of exactly the same duration and in corresponding positions
in the Timeline. This command is therefore usually limited to clips that were
previously joined and then split.

Changing the volume of clips

Audio clips and the soundtracks of video clips have a volume rubber band in the
middle that is used for adjusting sound volume. Simply drag the rubber band up or
down to change the volume.

To change the sound volume of a clip from the Timeline:

1. Select the clip whose sound volume you want to change.
2. Click on the rubber band (baseline) that appears in the middle of the clip. A
control point is placed at the position of your pointer.

Changing the sound volume from the Timeline

3. Drag the control point up to increase volume at this point, down to decrease.
(All the way to the top doubles the volume; all the way down means no sound).
To add additional control points, repeat steps 2 and 3.

To remove a control point, drag it off the top or bottom of the clip. If you
hold down the [SHIFT] key before adjusting the control points, you will see
values (in dB and %) for the exact volume.

Changing the speed of clips

Retiming clips is a very powerful feature that allows you into the “time domain” of
video playback. It empowers you to speed up or slow down the clips. On the
technical side it’s important to know that every media clip has a certain playback
speed expressed in frame rate. Let’s assume you have a video clip with a normal
speed of thirty frames per second. The motion is life-like.

Suppose you want to speed up the pace of the action two folds - make it move
faster twice. In this case, you will need to tell the program to cram all your thirty
frames in just a half a second time. Flip this concept and you will know how to slow
down things in your clip, make it twice slower - simply extend the thirty frames of
natural motion throughout sixty frames of video.
66 VIDEO EDITOR

To change the speed of your video in Video Editor, you will not need to bother
altering the actual amount of frames played per second. All you need to do is drag
on a clip’s edges.

By default, a clip is trimmed every time you drag on its edges. Thus to be able to
retime clips, you will need to activate a special mode in the Timeline that allows
you interactive retiming, Time Stretch. Dragging the edges of a clip in Time
Stretch mode will actually add or remove real frames in your video. Visual
shrinking of a clip leads to reducing the number of frames and speeding up the
video, whereas expanding a clip past its original borders slows down the motion.

All the retiming is done internally, source video files remain unchanged. Retiming
information is stored in the project file and is applied at rendering.

Time Stretch and Clip: Speed can also be applied to audio clips.

To retime a clip:

1. Click the Time Stretch Tool in the Timeline Toolbar.

2. Click-drag on any edge of a clip to either left or right.

Altering the speed of clips will remove Freeze Frame settings if they were
set on the clip prior to retiming. Freeze Frame is also removed when you
apply Speed attribute in the Timeline.

Another way to retime your clip is by entering numerical values for speed, duration
or variable speed in the Speed dialog box (Clip: Speed). This feature is extremely
useful if you need to achieve fast and slow motion effects having in mind exact
percentage by which to speed up or slow down the playback.

Here are the three methods in the Speed dialog box that allow direct access to clip
retiming:

• Speed - enter a value between 10 and 1000 percent to retime in a linear

fashion. Once entered, the speed value will be applied to the whole duration of
the clip.
• Duration - set the end time in the timecode boxes. Setting the end time before
the end of the original duration will speed up the clip, setting it past the mark
will slow down the motion of the video.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 67

The Duration dialog box (Clip: Duration) is for trimming only. It doesn’t
retime your clips.

• Variable Speed - enter a value between 10 and 1000 percent to retime in a

linear fashion with an option to key frame the values at different points in time.
Placing key frames with different speed values across your clip will vary its
playback speed interpolating from one value to another in a linear fashion.

If you choose Variable Speed mode, the audio of the clip will be removed.

Reversing the frames of a clip

Select Clip: Reverse (the Reverse command can also be accessed by right-
clicking the clip) to reverse the position of the frames in a clip and create a
backwards effect. Any audio accompanying the clip will also be reversed.

Relinking clips
Whenever you open a project, Video Editor performs a cross-check between the
clips in the project and their associated source files. If the source files are missing,
the Relink dialog box opens prompting you to relink the clips by browsing for the
correct folder or folders.

Video Editor includes a feature that works completely transparent (meaning that
you won't even notice it), called Smart Relink. If you have moved your files to
another drive or folder, but have basically maintained their positions relative to one
another, Smart Relink will automatically find all of the clips in the project that have
missing file links and locate the rest of the source files. This can be a huge time
saver.

If you click the Ignore button in the Relink dialog box, the clips on the Timeline
will appear blacked out. You can still work with them, but you won’t be able to
create previews or final video files.

Another way of relinking source files to their clips is by clicking Search: Find
Unlinked Clips. The dialog box that opens displays a list of the missing source
files, their associated file names, as well as options to relink, delete, or go to the
clip on the Timeline in question. If you choose to relink, the Relink Video File
dialog box opens allowing you to browse for the missing files.
68 VIDEO EDITOR

Calibrating video clips

If you have captured or inserted a video file whose colors you were unable to
properly calibrate (adjust) in Video Capture, you can do so directly from Video
Editor with the Clip: Color Calibration command (or right-click the clip and select
Color Calibration). This method uses Video Editor as a post production tool to
adjust the color. To properly use the Color calibration command, your video file
needs to have a color bar test pattern which was created by the video source, and
included with the file at the time of capture, otherwise this command has no
benefit.

For more on color calibration, see “Calibrating your display” on page 205 under
“Part II: Video Capture”.

Freezing a frame
A common technique in video editing is freezing a frame during playback. In Video
Editor, this is done by selecting Clip: Freeze Frame.

To freeze a frame during playback:

1. Select a clip and then split the audio from the video (see “Splitting the audio
from video clips” on page 64).
2. Right-click the clip and select Freeze Frame. The Freeze Frame dialog box
opens.
3. Use the slider under the Preview Window to find the frame you want to freeze.
4. Check Freeze before frame or Freeze after frame, or both, and then click
the corresponding arrow button. You can also directly enter the timecode and
set it as the frame to freeze. (See notes below for details.)

If your video file is field-based, select De-interlace freeze frame to

produce better video quality.

5. Enter how long you want the selected frames to be "frozen" in Freeze
duration.
6. Click OK.

If you need to edit the freeze frame attributes, select then right-click the clip and
choose Freeze Frame from the pop-up menu. If you only need to change the
freeze duration, you can press [Shift] and drag the end of the video clip in the
Timeline.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 69

• Freeze before frame. When the clip is played back, it will "freeze" on the
designated frame from the beginning of the clip, up to and including the
frame itself, and then resume normal playback.

• Freeze after frame. When the clip is played back, it will playback normally
until it comes to the designated frame and then "freeze" to the end of the
clip.

If both boxes are checked, the clip will freeze both before a particular frame
and after a particular frame. See the illustration below for an example.

Freeze before frame Freeze after frame

In the above illustration, the top row represents a normal clip of fifteen
frames. In the second row, Freeze before frame was selected and frame 5
was frozen. Frame 5 is then repeated (frozen) until frame 6 is reached.
Normal playback resumes. Freeze after frame was also selected with the
value of 10, and the frame is repeated (frozen) until the end of the clip. So
this clip freezes at two different points. If you want to freeze more frames
within this one clip, you must first use the Scissors Tool to cut your clip into
separate clips.

Setting field options for video clips

Video Editor allows you to work with both field-based and frame-based video files.
Field-based video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each
frame. This allows the video to play back flicker free on a television which
interlaces both of these fields in odd/even scan lines. If your video is only for
computer playback, you should save your work as frame-based.

To specify the type of video you are working with:

1. Select the clip.
2. Select Clip: Media Source Options. (Right-click the clip and from the pop-up
menu, select Media Source Options.) This will open the Media Source
Options dialog box.
70 VIDEO EDITOR

If you are working on frame-based video, select the Frame-based option in the
Frame type list. For field-based video, select either the Lower Field First or
Upper Field First option. Exactly which one depends on the type of video capture
board used to digitize the original video. (For more information, see the
documentation accompanying your video capture board.) If you cannot determine
the correct order, switch between the two and render a section of your movie to
see which gives you the best results.

If your video was originally field-based but you are editing the video as frame-
based, select the Deinterlace option. This helps combine the two fields into one
frame. For frame-based video that you are editing as field-based, select the
Flicker reduction option to help Video Editor create the two fields necessary for
each frame. This may require some initial experimentation, and may only be
apparent when you output your movie to a video tape. Click OK when you are
done setting the options.

• Display aspect ratio may be disabled if Perform non-square pixel

rendering is not selected in the Project Options dialog box or if the video
clip has a ratio of 16:9 or 4:3.

• If you already determined the aspect ratio settings in the Preferences dialog
box, you don't need to change the aspect ratio again in the Media Source
Options dialog box unless you want to use a different aspect ratio for a
particular video clip.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 71

Working with cues

Cues are simply bookmarks for your video project. As your projects get larger and
more complex, you can use cues to quickly jump from one place to another, easily
align clips when inserting them, or mark the location of a particular event. You can
name the cues and add descriptions. Cues can be added to the Timeline as a whole
(project cues) or to individual clips (clip cues). Also, there is a special kind called
chapter cues used only in projects that will be exported for DVD authoring in
programs like Ulead DVD MovieFactory.

Project cues

Clip cues

Placing project cues

You can place cues either directly on the cue bar or in the Preview Window.

To place a project cue on the cue bar:

1. Move the pointer to the cue bar (the bottom part of the ruler). The cursor
changes to the cue cursor.
2. Click on the appropriate location on the Timeline. A triangular blue cue marker
appears on the cue bar.

To place a project cue using the Preview Window:

1. Click Play [ENTER] to preview the project in the Preview Window or use the
Navigation bar to move to the place where you want to add a cue.
72 VIDEO EDITOR

2. Press [F5] on your keyboard when you want to add a cue (or click the Menu
button and choose Add/Delete Cue).
3. Cues (blue triangles) appear on the Timeline Cue Bar.

The default name of the clip (the variable &p) is the location of the cue on the
Timeline. For example, the default name of a cue at the 1 minute, 30 second point
would be ‘01:30:00’. Right-click a cue to view its name. If you wish to move a cue,
drag it to a new location. To remove a cue, drag it off the edges of the Timeline.
Select View: Cue Manager to delete cues, rename them or jump to a specific
cue.

Placing clip cues

You can also place cues on individual clips. They are quite useful for aligning clips
in different tracks and for accurately combining video and audio clips. In this case,
the cues are black and appear on the Timeline immediately below the clip. These
cues cannot be named but can be used as navigation points in the Source Window
by clicking the Next/Previous Edit Point buttons.

To place clip cues using the Source Window:

1. Open a clip in the Source Window (double-click the clip or drag it to the
Source Window).
2. Play the clip or use the Navigation Bar to move to the place where you want
to place a cue.
3. Press [F5] (or click the Menu button and choose Add/Delete Cue).

• The Source Window displays an audio cue bar when you have an audio
clip. Click on the cue bar to add audio cues. To remove cues, drag them
off of the cue bar.

• Alternatively, click the Source Window Menu . You can select Clip Cue
Manager from the menu to add, delete, and rename clip cues.

4. Continue adding cues and click the Apply button when finished.

To view clip cues on the Timeline:

1. Click View: Timeline Display Mode or the Timeline Display Mode button.
2. Select Show cue bar for video and/or audio tracks.

Project cues are always visible at the top of the Timeline.

 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 73

Placing chapter cues

The third type is chapter cues. You will only need to set them if you plan to export
your project to either Ulead DVD Workshop or Ulead DVD MovieFactory. There,
your chapter cues will be used for easy navigation through DVD movies. All the
chapter points set in Video Editor will be recognized by both - DVD Workshop and
MovieFactory.

To set chapter cues in the Timeline:

1. Click Display Mode . Alternatively, click View: Timeline Display Mode.

2. Select Chapter point cue bar.
3. Click OK.
4. The horizontal bar beneath the Timeline Ruler now becomes the chapter point
cue bar. Click on this bar to set more chapter points. A green triangle indicator
appears as you add a chapter point. (To remove a Chapter point, drag the
triangle icon all the way to the left).

You can also use the DVD Chapter Point Manager in the View menu to
manage your chapter cues.

Locating clips
You can use cues to jump to a specific location in your project instantly.

To locate a specific clip:

1. Click the Find Clip button or Search: Find Clip [CTRL+F]. This displays
the start time, duration, track and name of all the cues contained within the
current video project.
2. To go directly to a clip, select it under Start Time in the list box.
3. Click OK.

To go to another clip from the same source file, click the Find Next button on
the Standard Toolbar or click Search: Find Next [F2].
74 VIDEO EDITOR

You can also use the Production Library to view all the clips in the current video
project and search through text annotated to the clips.

You can also use the Production Library to view all the clips in the current
video project and search through text annotated to the clips.

To jump to a cue or a specific time:

1. Click Search: Go To.
2. In the Go To dialog box, enter a time or select a cue.
3. Click the To button. The Timeline jumps to your selection with a yellow arrow
pointing to the specific jump.

Locating an empty time slot

In the course of creating a large project, you may have left blank spaces in the
Timeline to fill at a later time. Click Search: Find Empty Time Slots to find
these.

When you view the Find Empty Time Slot dialog box, there will always be one
time slot listed. This is the time slot at the end of the video project and cannot
be deleted.

Trimming clips
Trimming and editing clips is the basis of making movies. There are a number of
convenient methods for doing this in Video Editor. Each of these offers different
advantages depending on the type of clip and the operations you wish to perform.

To trim using the Clip Selection Tool:

1. Click the Clip Selection Tool .

2. Drag the left or right border of the clip.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 75

How far you can drag depends on the type of clip and/or its duration. For example,
you cannot extend the length of a video or audio clip to exceed the duration of its
source file. Image, title, and color clips can be extended indefinitely. Zooming in
[+] on the Timeline will help in trimming a clip with accuracy.

Select Clip: Duration if you need extreme precision for the clip length. In the
Duration dialog box, type the desired length for the clip.

Trimming in the Source Window

One way which you can use to trim your videos is to use the Source window.

To trim a video in the Source Window:

1. Double-click a video clip in the Timeline.
2. In the Source Window, drag the Jog slider to the position you want as the mark-
in point and then press [F3].
3. Drag the Jog slider to the position you want as the mark-out point and then
press [F4].
4. Click Apply in the Source Window.

• Use the left-arrow or right-arrow key on your keyboard to go through your

video frame by frame. Each key press moves you one frame forward or back.
You can also hold down [Shift] and use the mouse to drag the Jog slider.
This feature is particularly useful if the video clip duration is very long or you
want to make precise trimming.

• This displays the clip duration. You can enter new values here to change the
length of the clip.

You can also use the Source Window to cut your video clips. Video Editor gives you
two options on how you can cut your video clips: Cut by Position and Cut by
Cue. Cut by Position slices the video clip based on the position of the Jog slider.
Cut by Cue slices the video clip based on the cue positions.
76 VIDEO EDITOR

Trimming in the Preview Window

As you trim, Preview Window will display the real-time result of your actions. This
is a preferable way of trimming if precision is not critical but time is important.

To trim a video in the Preview Window:

1. Click-select a video clip in the Timeline.
2. Drag its edges to trim the clip. Notice the realtime preview of the trimming
operation in the Preview Window.

If the Preview Window and Trim Window are open simultaneously, the
feedback will be streamed to the Trim Window only.

Setting preview range in Preview Window is different from the trimming in the
Source Window or Trim Window. After you set the mark-in and mark-out points in
the Preview Window, your project preview range will be limited to the “trimmed”
duration that was set in the Preview Window.

To set a preview range in the Preview Window:

1. Open the Preview Window.
2. Drag the little triangle trim handle on the left end to the desired play-in point.
Alternatively, drag the Jog slider to the position you want as the mark-in point
and then press [F3].
3. Drag the trim handle on the right to desired play-out point. Alternatively, drag
the Jog slider to the position you want as the mark-out point and press [F4].

4. Click Play Preview Range in the Preview Window to play the trimmed
segment.

Using the Trim Window

The Trim Window is the most precise method of trimming your clips, frame by
frame.

To use the Trim Window:

1. Select Window: Trim Window.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 77

2. Select Edit: Trim Options and select how you want to trim the clip. See
“Defining trim options” on page 78.

If you have the Stitch trim option selected, only the previous frame is
displayed whenever you use the Trim Window.

3. Grab the edge of the clip you want to trim. The Trim Window displays two
frames. The clip will be trimmed between these two frames when you release
the mouse button.

• Hold down the mouse button and use the arrow keys to move frame by
frame.
• To trim a title clip using the Trim Window, press [Shift] as you drag the edge
of the title clip.
• The Trim Window has no effect if you are using the Time Selection Tool.

Using the Scissors Tool to trim clips

To cut a clip:
1. Click the Scissors Tool (or hold down the [S] key on your keyboard).
2. Click on the place where you want to cut the clip.

Cutting a clip breaks the clip at the pointer position, creating two separate clips
that you can then move around the Timeline. If you place two previously cut clips
back in their original positions you can reattach them together by clicking (with the
Scissors Tool selected) over the cut line.
78 VIDEO EDITOR

Cutting a clip with the Scissors tool

Hold down the [SHIFT] key on your keyboard to cut across multiple tracks.

Defining trim options

While trimming is a basic operation, it does have more advanced features. The
effect of trimming on neighboring clips is determined by the Trim Options. Select
Edit: Trim Options to choose the following:

Normal allows you to trim a clip only within the available free clip slot.

Overwrite allows you to trim a clip so that it extends over a

neighboring clip, thereby replacing the overlapped portion with the new
clip (if you then trim the clip back it will still leave an empty slot).

Stitch allows you to trim a clip over another, trimming the neighboring
clip instead of overwriting it (if you then trim the clip back, it will reveal
the underlying portion of the other clip which is then "untrimmed"). This
is useful if you want to merge two clips together and need to see the
frames of each clip in the Trim Window. (If the two clips are not adjacent
you can only trim the active clip to the duration of the clip slot.)

An example of stitching one clip over another

 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 79

Smart Trim
The trimming procedures described on the preceding pages are completely non-
destructive and do not affect the original source files in any way. While this is a
major advantage to editing video on a computer, there may be times where,
because of a lack of free hard disk space, you want to actually trim your source
files according to your edits.

In the Project menu, select Smart: Smart Trim. In the dialog box that opens,
you can select the clip or clips that you want to permanently alter.

Multi-trim Video
Sometimes, marking only the start and the end points to trim a clip just isn’t
enough. There could be situations when you will need to mark multiple start/end
points. Let’s say you recorded a TV program and you want to trim out all the nine
commercials in the clip. For that, you will need to use the Multi-trim Video
function available from the Production Library toolbar.

1 Shuttle Slider - Preview the clip at different playback speeds.

2 Jog Wheel - Use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

80 VIDEO EDITOR

To trim a video file into multiple clips:

1. Import your video file into the Production Library. Select the video file, then
click Multi-trim Video .

2. In the Multi-trim Video dialog box, view the whole clip first by clicking to
determine how you want to mark segments.
3. Drag the Jog Slider until you get to the part of the video that you want to use
as the beginning frame of the first segment. Click Start .

4. Drag the Jog Slider again, this time, to the point where you want the segment
to end. Click End .

5. Do steps 3 and 4 repeatedly until you have marked all the segments you want
kept or removed.

• To mark segments, you can also press [F3] and [F4] while playing the
video.

• Click Invert Selection to toggle between marking segments that

you want to retain or marking segments that you want taken out from the
clip.

6. Click OK when finished. The video segments that you kept are then inserted
onto the Timeline.

Navigation controls in the Multi-trim Video dialog box:

Reverses or advances through the video in fixed increments. By default,
these buttons move up or down through the video in increments of 25
[F5] [F6] seconds.
Plays a preview of the final trimmed video.

Plays the video file. Hold [Shift] then click to play only the selected
segments.
Moves to the start or end frame of a trimmed segment.

Moves to the previous/next frame in the video.

 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 81

Split by Scene
Split by Scene allows you to separate scenes in your DV video clip into several
clips. This function is very useful when wanting to insert transition effects between
segments in a single DV video clip. It can be accessed in three different locations:
Insert Video File dialog box, right-click pop-up menu in the Production Library,
and in the right-click menu on the Timeline.

To use Split by Scene:

1. Select the DV video clip then access the Split by Scene function.

The Split by Scene option is disabled when the selected video clip does
not contain any scene information.

2. The Scenes & Recording Cuts dialog box appears.

When the different scenes of the video clip are not displayed, click Scan to
generate the scene information.

3. Preview, join, or split videos if needed.

4. When done, select the Open scenes & recording cuts as multiple clips
option.
5. Click OK. The file will then be split into multiple clips according to different
scenes.

Each separated clip is merely a trimmed version of the captured video file. Each of
the clips is not an independent file. Hence, notice that the clips all bear the same
file name indicating that they actually come from a single video file.

The Split by Scene function will be disabled when the DV clip has been
trimmed or an effect has been applied.
82 VIDEO EDITOR

Ripple Editing
Ripple editing is a mode in Video Editor that allows you to insert clips and
automatically push other clips out of the way so the new clip will fit on the
Timeline.

To select a Ripple Editing mode click one of three Ripple Editing buttons on the
Timeline toolbar or choose from the Edit: Ripple Editing menu list. See the next
two pages for specific examples.

No Ripple mode means that newly inserted clips are trimmed to fit the
available empty time slot.

When you are in No Ripple mode, select a file to insert and hold down
the [SHIFT] key while placing the clip on the Timeline. When this file
is dropped on the Timeline, it will push all downstream clips in a single
track out of the way. Empty spaces will NOT be preserved if the clip
length fits perfectly or is longer than the available slot.

Single-Track Ripple editing will move everything (including empty

space) out of the way to make room for the inserted clip, but only on the
target track.

Multi-Track Ripple editing will move everything (including empty space)

out of the way to make room for the inserted clip, moving all clips (audio
and transitions included) on all tracks.

• With any of the Ripple Editing modes selected, you cannot trim clips toward
the start of the project (frame 0), unless there is an empty clip slot for the
preceding clip to occupy.

• Ripple Editing only has an effect when the Normal Trim option is selected.

• Ripple Editing has no effect when dragging clips around the Timeline. It is
only enacted when inserting, trimming, cutting, clearing or pasting clips.

• With either Single or Multi-track Ripple mode selected, hold down the
SHIFT key while inserting a clip onto an occupied slot. This will split the
existing clip on the Timeline and insert your clip in between.

• When Ripple Editing is turned on and you delete a clip, all downstream clips
move left to fill in the space vacated by the deleted clip.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 83

Ripple Editing examples

The following illustrations will help you understand the sometimes complex, but
extremely important and useful aspects of Ripple Editing.

All of the following examples involve the initial insertion of a clip from outside
of the Timeline. When moving already inserted clips around within the
Timeline, results will differ.

Automatically overlaying an inserted clip (No Ripple)

No Ripple mode allows you to insert clips without temporal changes in other clips
position. In other words, inserting clips in No Ripple editing mode will not affect
positions of the clips on the Timeline. In the following example, two clips are
already on the Timeline while the third is being inserted. After insertion, the third
clip gets overlaid over the two neighbors without shifting them.

Inserting a clip into a full Timeline (Ripple)

In this example, the third clip is again inserted between the two clips. This time,
Single Track Ripple is selected.

As the clip is being inserted, the clip to the right is moved to the right two seconds.
The entire track is shifted, spaces and all. (If you don't want the spaces preserved,
use Push Away Insertion. See “Push Away insertion” on page 51.)
84 VIDEO EDITOR

This time, Multi-Track Ripple is selected:

Everything downstream, including spaces, is shifted to the right three seconds.

This will include transitions and clips on all of the other tracks. The entire project
(to the right of the insertion point) is moved a few seconds to accommodate the
new clip.

Ripple editing modes are valid only for the clips being inserted. Once you
place your clips on the Timeline, changing their position will have no ripple
effect whatsoever.

Inserting clips into the middle of an existing clip

Clips can be inserted right into the middle of an existing clip, automatically cutting
the clip at the insertion point.

To insert a clip into another:

1. Select Edit: Ripple Editing: Single- or Multi-Track.
2. Click the Insert Video File button.
3. In the Insert Video dialog box, select the clip you want to insert.
4. Click the Open button.
5. Press and hold the [SHIFT] key while clicking in the middle of the clip on the
Timeline that you want to insert the new clip into.

Here green.avi is inserted into red.avi. Multi-Track Ripple is on. In the first
image, you can see where the inserted clip overlaps the existing clips. Notice how
the red clip is split into two parts and the green clip is dropped into the middle.
Again, the entire project (to the right of the insertion point) is shifted right three
seconds.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 85

Using the Source Window

The Source Window is a single, integrated tool that lets you easily view the
contents of any audio, video, or image clip, perform trimming operations, and
place clip specific cues. Clips can be dragged to and from the Source Window and
into the Timeline or Production Library. A quick double-click will immediately open
up a clip in the Source Window. The Source Window itself is made visible by
selecting the Source Window button on the Standard Toolbar or by using the
Window: Source Window command. Once a clip is opened you can use the
menu list to select any other clip which you have previously opened in the Source
Window, listed by track and start time. The next few pages cover the Source
Window in more detail.

1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
9
10
11

Source Window
1 Playback slider slides back and forth to scrub the clip.

2 Trim handles determine the Mark-in and Mark-out points of the trim area.

3 Current position displays, and allows you to edit, the time of the current position of
the Playback slider.

4 Jog wheel use to scroll to different parts of the clip.

5 Shuttle slider preview the clip at different playback speeds.

86 VIDEO EDITOR

6 Trim bar shows the trimmed portion of the clip (between the Trim Handles).

7 Trim area displays, and allows you to edit the current duration of the trim area.

8 Clip menu displays, and allows you to choose, any of the clips loaded into the
Source Window.

9 Source Window Menu button displays several options for resizing the Source Win-
dow, importing files, viewing the properties of the clip, finding the clip in the Timeline
and adding, deleting, and managing cues.

10 Apply button applies all editing done in the Source Window to the clip in the Time-
line.

11 Navigation bar (See details below.)

Source Window Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Play (Pause) plays the entire clip from beginning to end.

2 Play Mark Area (Pause) plays only the trim area from Mark-in to Mark-out portion.

3 Play from the current position to Mark-out (Pause) plays the clip from the cur-
rent position of the Playback slider to the Mark-out point.

4 Previous Edit Point moves the Playback slider to the previous cue or the beginning
of the clip.

5 Previous Frame moves the Playback slider to the previous frame.

6 Next Frame allows you to maneuver the Playback slider one frame at a time.

7 Next Edit Point moves the Playback slider to the previous or next cue or the end of
the clip.

8 Repeat plays the active clip continuously.

9 Mark-in and Mark-out allows you to position the Trim Handles at the current loca-
tion of the Playback slider and adjust the Trim Area.

When trimming videos in the Source Window, the entire trim area can be
repositioned by dragging it. The Playback slider automatically slides along with
while dragging on the Trim handle.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 87

The pointer will change to a hand when placed over the trim area. Use this hand to
drag the two trim handles when trimming and moving the trim area as a whole.
Right-click on the trim area to automatically reset both trim handles to their
original positions at the beginning and end of the original clip. Both the Current
Position display and Trim Area display boxes can be manually edited. Just click
on the box and key in the new numbers to automatically re-adjust the Jog slider
and/or Trim handle.

To trim an audio clip:

1. Place the red vertical line where you want to begin the trim selection area.
2. Click the Mark-in button. The unselected area changes to a blue waveform on a
gray background.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 with the Mark-out button.

Alternatively, to mark an audio clip segment, press the [Shift] key and
drag the mouse over a selection.

4. Click the Apply button. The clip on the Timeline is adjusted.

Mark-in
point

Trim area

Mark-out
point

Zoom tool

Visible area

Additional unlabeled controls are the same as the Source Window for video
clips (see “Using the Source Window” on page 85). Trimming the audio track of
a clip with attached video will also trim the corresponding video track.
88 VIDEO EDITOR

Previewing your work

Video Editor allows you to see a portion of your project without performing a full
save. It lets you render a small section of your project before you create your final
video at the end. This way you can view a few seconds of a transition between two
clips without having to take the time to render the whole thirty minute project. If
your capture board supports an external monitor, you can also preview the output
there.

The Preview Window itself is very similar to the Source Window. Where the Source
Window is used to view, trim and add cues to individual clips, the Preview Window
is used to view your project, either in full or in part, or to add project cues.

Preview Window

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Play/Pause plays a preview of all the clips in the video project.

2 Play the Preview Range plays only the clips in the preview area.

3 Play to Mark-out plays clips starting from the current pointer position.

4 Timeline History Menu allows you to choose a timeline to playback from. Select it
from the list of available timelines.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 89

5 Preview Window Menu displays a pop-up menu for adding/deleting project cues,
changing the video frame size, playing video in full screen, and more.

6 Instant Play swithes between Instant Playback and High-quality playback render-
ing.

Previewing
Video Editor offers real-time previewing for your projects. With this feature, you
can instantly see how filters and effects you apply look on your video. You can then
make the necessary adjustments when needed.

When you want to preview your work, press [ENTER] or click Play on the Preview
Window. If your project is long, this could take some time. Often you will only want
to preview part of your project, for example, a few seconds of a transition
sequence or an overlay effect. There are three different ways to select the portion
of your project you want to preview:

• Create a preview area on the Preview bar over the Timeline. The cursor
appears with a little hand icon under it when over the Preview bar. A blue bar in
the Preview Window indicates the period for preview. Drag the edges of the
white Preview bar in the Timeline or the little triangle icons in the Preview
Window to set the in and out points of the preview. Alternatively, place the jog
slider on a mark-in point in the Preview Window and press [F3]; press [F4] for
the mark-out point. A right-click on the cue bar in the Timeline will delete the
preview range.
• Use the Preview Window to create a preview range. Use the Trim handles to
define the preview range. This is also represented as a blue line, both in the
Preview Window and on the Preview bar above the Timeline.

• Click Edit: Preview Range and enter specific timecode values to define
the preview area.
• This displays the duration of the marked preview area. You can enter new
values to change the length of the Preview range.

After selecting the preview range, click the Play [SPACE BAR] button to begin
the preview. You can change the size of the Preview Window by clicking on the
Preview Window Menu button, then selecting Frame Size List, and choosing a
predefined size from the list that appears.
90 VIDEO EDITOR

Instant Play
Instant Play lets you quickly see the changes you have made in your project in the
Preview Window. Simply click the Instant Play button or access it in the Preview
Window Menu to enable or disable it.

Since the complexity of a project may vary (e.g. a lot of special effects) in different
segments, you can set the Performance Level (by right-clicking the Toggle button)
to determine whether Video Editor renders a preview file or not when you are
previewing your video clip.

Video Editor renders only when a segment's complexity level is above the
performance level you set. The Performance Level you set should be relative to
your CPU speed.

A segment refers to a vertical stack in the Timeline.

You may also force a particular segment to be rendered to have a smoother

preview.

To force a segment to render:

1. Right-click on the Complexity bar just below the Timescale.
2. Select Force To Render Segment & Preview. Video Editor creates a preview
file of the particular segment even when in Instant playback mode then
automatically previews the rendered segment.
3. You can also set the preview range by selecting Set Preview Range or force
the segment to render at the same time by selecting Set Preview Range &
Render Preview.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 91

Preview Window Menu button

Performance Level
Playback Options

Toggle button (Instant Playback

or High-Quality Playback)

In addition to Instant Playback, Video Editor offers a variety of playback

monitoring options. This feature can be accessed from File: Playback Options or
the pop-up menu when clicking the Preview Window Menu button.

Depending on the project settings, the display card, and the external monitor type
you have, you can preview your work in the target display devices you choose.
This feature is useful when you want to preview your work in the device where you
will actually play your project.

Toggle button to High Quality Playback to render the whole project before
previewing. This produces better image quality and smoother transition of clips.
92 VIDEO EDITOR

Using DV SmartPlay
DV SmartPlay plays your project (with a DV file format templates only) directly
from the Timeline out to a DV camcorder or other IEEE-1394 devices without
rendering a final movie file. It also lets you view a project on an external monitor
at any time.

To use DV SmartPlay:
1. Select Project: Project Settings and click Edit. Here, select the options
corresponding to your video clip attributes. (For example, on the AVI tab, make
sure the audio format is set to DV Audio -- NTSC/PAL.)
2. Connect your DV camcorder or other IEEE-1394 device to the PC and turn it on.
3. Select File: Select Device Control to make sure a proper device control is
activated.
4. Select File: Print to Tape - Timeline. Here, choose Entire project or Preview
range, and then click OK.

Performing scrub previews

You can instantly preview your video "on-the-fly" at any time. This is known as
scrubbing and is the quickest way to get an idea of how your project is going.
When you scrub, you can preview your transitions and the timing of your video,
but filters and effects will not be visible unless your hardware supports them.
Unlike performing a regular preview, however, scrubbing an area with too many
effects may not be smooth.

Before performing a scrub preview, set scrubbing preferences such as preferred

preview playback source in the Scrubbing Options dialog box. You can access
this through the Preview Window menu.

To perform a scrub preview:

1. Move the pointer up to the top of the ruler above the Timeline. It will change to
a star .

2. Drag your mouse across the top of the ruler to view your
preview in the Preview Window. You can also use the Jog
slider to scrub from within the Preview Window.
 CHAPTER 3: EDITING 93

Previewing on an external device

Preview your video and transition effects on an external device. You can use your
TV (if you have a dual-head display card) and even your DV camcorder's LCD
screen to preview your project. You can set the external preview viewing device by
selecting File: Playback Options.

To set an external preview viewing device for your transition effects, click in
the transition effect's dialog box.

Managing preview files

The files that are created for the preview (if high-quality playback is selected) are
saved in a temporary folder that can be set from File: Preferences on the
Preview tab. Preview files can take up a huge amount of disk space, so it is
important to set these folders up properly. Sometimes, MediaStudio Pro will
generate a "Not enough disk space" error when previewing. This error often occurs
because you need to specify additional space for these files on another disk.

Specific preview files can be controlled by going to File: Preview Files Manager.
You can see how much disk space your preview files occupy and then decide
whether or not to delete them.
94 VIDEO EDITOR
 4

ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES

From transition effects between scenes to stunning video filters and amazing
animated moving paths, MediaStudio Pro has it all. Let your creativity run wild
as you learn about the most fun and exciting features of Video Editor.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Using transition effects

Using key frame controls in dialog boxes
Effects Manager
Overlay
Applying video filters
Creating a moving path
Applying audio filters
Creating titles
96 VIDEO EDITOR

Using transition effects

An integral part of any video or film presentation is the transition effects used to
enhance the way clips merge, fade, and cut from one scene to another. An
appropriate and well placed transition effect can make your video sequence flow
better and add impact to your work.

Transition effects basics

After you drop clips on a video track, clips can either have an empty space in
between, sit frame by frame next to each other or overlap. When they overlap, a
default transition clip will be automatically added to the overlapped region.

The amount of overlap determines the effect duration, which will automatically
adjust when you readjust the overlapping region.

To specify a default transition for overlapping clips you will need to set it in the
Preferences dialog box.

To set a default transition:

1. Select File: Preferences
2. Click the Edit tab.
3. In Default transition effect click the Select button.
4. Choose any transition from the list in the Production Library pop-up window.
5. Click OK to apply the settings.

The added transition clip must be attached to a video clip. You can trim or
delete the transition clip.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 97

To manually add a transition effect:

1. Place two video clips on a video track, making sure the clips overlap a little.
2. Open the Production Library and select the Transition Effect folder to
display its gallery of effects.

The Transition Effect gallery displays all the available transition effects in
Video Editor. There are over one hundred transitions which are conveniently
grouped into folders. Each effect is displayed as an animated thumbnail for
easy identification.

3. Drag-and-drop an effect onto the overlapping clips.

4. Double-click on the transition in timeline, Transition Options dialog box
appears. Click OK and preview.

The Transition Options dialog box is where you can customize your transitions. You
can alter the speed, the direction, the border, and apply any number of little
nuances to your transition with the Key Frame Controller. Each effect has slightly
different controls. Refer to the next section for details.

Customizing a transition
There are a number of options available in the Transition Options dialog box that
let you customize your transition. The variety of these available options depends
on the type of transition you are applying. The following is just one example
among hundreds.

Transition Options dialog box (for the Box-Wipe transition effect)

1
7

3
4 8
5
9 10
11
6
12
13
15
14
16
98 VIDEO EDITOR

1 Transition selects which video clip starts the transition.

2 Divide X/Y by divides the screen horizontally/vertically to produce duplicates.

3 Color square specifies the color for the border.

4 Border specifies the size of the border at the edge of the transition.

5 Soft edge softens the transition edges.

6 Direction buttons set the movement of the transition.

7 Sample window displays a preview of the selected transition.

8 Key Frame Controller specifies the key frames at which different settings are
applied to the clip.

9 Speed control selects the preview play speed.

10 Show background displays actual video in the sample window.

11 Preview button plays the effect with its current settings.

12 Preview Playback Options opens a dialog box where you can specify where to
preview the filter/effect.

13 Play in Preview Window or External Monitor outputs the results in Video Edi-
tor's Preview and/or an external monitor.

14 Transition degree specifies the degree of completion at the current frame.

15 X and Y indicate the coordinates for the starting point of the transition.

16 Reverse changes the direction of the transition.

To customize a transition effect:

1. Insert a Box-Wipe transition effect between two clips.

Every transition effect clip placed between the clips contains a horizontal
“switch” which allows you to change the direction of the transition without
having to open the Transition Options dialog box. Clicking the green arrow
switch changes the direction of the transition effect from Forward to
Backward.

2. In the Transition Options dialog box, adjust the Divide by X value to 2. This
divides the screen vertically to produce two box-wipe effects on the screen at
the same time.

Double-click a previously inserted transition to open the Transition

Options dialog box. It is automatically opened when you insert a new
transition only when the Display Options dialog box option is selected in
File: Preferences: General tab.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 99

3. Enter a Border value of 1. Change the color of the border by clicking on the
Color square and selecting a color.
4. Select one of the two Direction buttons to set the movement of the transition.
5. Enter an X value of 60 and a Y value of 50. This is the starting position of the
transition effect.

You can also set the starting position by dragging the control point that
appears in the center of the sample image. This option may not be
available for all effects.

6. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the attributes to the transition
effect. Preview the new transition.

You now have a customized transition. When you have done this, it is an excellent
idea to save this customized effect to the Production Library for future use.

To save a transition effect:

1. Modify a preset transition as detailed above.
2. In the Transition Options dialog box, click Add to send the effect to the
Production Library.
3. Enter a name and a description. Click OK.

Commonly used transitions

While Video Editor has dozens and dozens of different transition effects to choose
from, the jump cut with no transition and the crossfade are probably the only two
that are commonly used in Hollywood movies. Another popular technique is to fade
to black at the end of a program or scene.

To fade to black:
1. Place a video clip onto the Video1 track.
2. Create a black color clip (see “Inserting title, color, and silence clips” on
page 49) and drag onto the same Video1 track, making sure the start of the
color clip overlaps the end of the video clip.
3. From the F/X folder, drag the Crossfade transition effect onto the overlapping
region between the clips.
4. Adjust the Transition Options dialog box (make sure the transition is selected
as Forward) and click OK. Preview the effect.
100 VIDEO EDITOR

Using Crossfade to create a fade to black effect

It is of course trivial to reverse this effect to fade from black at the start of your
movie. Just make sure that the color clip precedes the video clip in the Timeline
and then make sure that you change the direction of the transition to go from the
black color clip to the video clip.

Another common effect is called the Turn Page effect, located in the Film folder of
the Production Library. Simply drag the effect onto the transition between two
overlapping clips to replace it with the Turn Page effect.

Turn Page transition effect

Depending on your hardware, it may take a little time for the effect to be created
by your computer. This is called rendering time. To see your transition effect
without rendering your project, use the Instant Play function (see “Instant Play”
on page 90). A jump cut, where the clips are simply placed beside each other on
the same track, requires no rendering time and is sometimes just as useful. Video
Editor offers so many fun and interesting transition effects that it is sometimes
easy to get carried away and use them between every clip. A fancy transition is not
always the best artistic choice however, and can at times be distracting. Simple
jump cuts or fades are often your best choices.

The Flashback transition

You can use the Flashback transition to simulate a flashback or introduce a dream
sequence for the next scene. Light is added to the dissolving scenes to create a
dreamy effect.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 101

The Flashback transition contains the following options:

• Fade level: Set the thickness of the soft edge of the mask.

• Halo brightness: Set the intensity of the light.

• Halo size: Set the coverage of the light.

• Contrast: Set the color contrast between the two clips.

• Middle flash: Adds an element of light to the dissolving mask.

• Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.

The Mask transitions

Different patterns or objects such as shapes, leaves, balls, and more can be used
in transition effects by rendering them as masks. You can select from preset masks
or import a BMP file and use it as a mask for your transition.

Mask A

Mask B

Mask C
102 VIDEO EDITOR

Mask transition options

The Mask transitions contain the following options. The availability of the option
depends on the type of mask selected.

• Rotation: Specify how many degrees the mask will rotate.

• Fade level: Set the thickness of the soft edge of the mask.

• Size: Set the size of the mask.

• Sync Clip: Matches the motion of the clip to the motion of the mask.

• Inverse: Reverses the effect of the mask.

• X/Y Opposite: Reverses the path direction of the Mask.

• Mask: Select a preset template to use as mask for the transition.

• Current: Click to open a dialog box where you can browse BMP files to use as the
transition’s mask.

• Interval: Specify the distance between each copy of the mask.

• Path: Select how the mask will move during the transition.

• Middle flash: Adds an element of light to the dissolving mask.

• Apply on: Select whether to apply the mask on the before or after clip.

Audio transitions
Transition effects are primarily for video. In Video Editor’s File:Preferences -
Edit, you can specify how you want your audio clips to interact in the event of
overlapping. There are two options: an auto cross-fade and a simple mix
transition.

In the first case, when two audio clips in the same track overlap, an auto cross-
fade will be created between them. The volume of the first clip will be faded to zero
starting from the beginning of the overlap. At the same point on the track the
volume of the second clip will be gradually faded in.

To specify an audio cross-fade between clips:

1. Go to File:Preferences - Edit tab.
2. Click in the check box near Apply auto audio cross-fade.
3. Select one of the Audio cross-fade resampling options. Selecting Linear will
fade overlapping segments from zero to one hundred percent in a linear
fashion over the overlapping segment duration. If you select Logarithmic, all
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 103

the cross-fading will be done in a smooth interpolating fashion and varied time/
volume values.

After specifying the option, every time your audio clips overlap, a default auto
cross-fade will be created between them.

Unchecking the Apply auto audio cross-fade box disables the auto cross-fade.
In this case, the overlapping segments between audio clips will remain as they
were, the clips’ ends will be simply merged. If you listen to the transition, you will
hear both of the clips playing at the same time.

Using key frame controls in dialog boxes

Key frames are frames in a clip where you can specify a different attribute or
behavior for an applied effect. Use key frames to customize how an effect
progresses from the beginning to the end of a clip. All of the effects in Video
Editor can be controlled with frame-by-frame precision using key frames.

The Key Frame Controller can be found in the following: all Video and Audio
Filters, Moving Path, Transition dialog boxes, Overlay Options dialog box and
Speed dialog box.

As an example, the procedure below uses the Circle-Wipe transition effect dialog
box to create a customized transition animated with key frames.

To use key frames to animate a transition effect:

1. Place two clips on a single video track, make sure the clips overlap.
2. From the Wipe folder in the Production Library under Transition Effect,
drag the Circle-Wipe thumbnail into the overlapping area.

3. In the Circle-Wipe dialog box, drag the slider on the Key

frame Controller about one-third of the way down.

4. Click the Add Key frame button .

5. Drag the Transition degree slider to approximately 75%.
6. Go back up to the Key frame Controller and drag the slider about two-thirds
of the way down. Click the Add Key frame button.
104 VIDEO EDITOR

7. Drag the Transition degree slider to approximately 25%. Preview the effect.

You should have a circle that expands, contracts, and then expands out again to
complete the transition.

To add a key frame:

1. Drag the Key frame Controller slider to the desired position.
2. Click the Add Key frame button.

To remove a key frame:

1. Click on the unwanted key frame (it will turn red).

2. Click on the Remove Key frame button .

To move a key frame:

To move any key frame, just drag it to a new location. Since key frames are
chronological in nature, it is impossible to drag a key frame beyond a neighboring
key frame on either side.

To reverse key frames:

1. Click on any key frame diamond on the Key frame Controller.
2. Click the Reverse Frame button.

This does not simply reverse the key frames, but actually inverts the entire
effect.

For a list of shortcut keys when using key frame controls, please refer to the
Shortcuts section of this manual. These shortcut keys are valid whenever you are
working with key frame controls inside a dialog box.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 105

Effects Manager
There could be quite a few adjustable values in any given effect. You can control
and animate these values in time setting new keyframes and adjusting their
properties in a particular effect dialog box. This technique is fine as long as you
have just a few keyframes. As complexity builds up, you will need to set up
multiple keyframes on a particular value. Once the number of keyframes increases
or you apply several effects to a clip, you will find Effects Manager a more effective
medium for working with keyframes and effects.

The Effects Manager is subdivided into three primary areas:

Effects List
Key Frame
Controller

Settings Area

Effects List shows various effects you applied to your clip - video and audio
filters, moving paths, transition effects and overlay. Clicking on the effect
displayed here will load up its keyframes in Key Frame Controller and populate
the Settings Area with effect controls.

Before using the Effects Manager, you will need:

1. To apply an effect to your clip. You can do this by dragging an effect from the
Production Library and dropping it onto your clip, or by selecting appropriate
commands in the Clip menu.
2. Open the Preview Window to preview the changes in effects.
106 VIDEO EDITOR

Here is how to set multiple key frames and tweak settings on a clip with a Blur
effect applied to it (Video Effects: Blur).

To set multiple key frames and adjust their settings:

1. Select a clip in Timeline with the Blur effect already applied to it.
2. Click Window: Effects Manager
3. Open up the Preview Window if it’s not in the workplace.
4. Select Blur above Video Filter in Effects List. If Blur is not readily available,
click a small triangle near the Video Filter line to expand the tree.
5. Set Level value in the Settings Area to 1 at frame 1.

6. Move two seconds towards the end of clip, click the Add key frame button
to add a new keyframe.
7. Set the blur level to 5 at the current playback cursor position.
8. Move forward two more seconds and set the value to 1 again.
9. Move forward yet two more seconds and set the value back to 5 again.
10.Mark in the playback range at frame 1 then mark it out at 8 seconds.
11.Preview the 8-second range and notice how the blur value animates through
the clip.

This is just a simple example to get you started changing effects values, setting
multiple key frames and animating them in a linear fashion.

Previewing the applied effects

Tweaking the settings on key frames require real-time interactivity. There are two
preview modes in MediaStudio Pro - via the Preview Window or external monitor.
Both of the options can be used simultaneously if you have the right hardware
configuration. Specifically, your graphics card has to support an external monitor.

When you need a real time preview you can limit it to the effect bearing clip only
or watch the output with all project element in the timeline:

To pre-render, click . Click to continuously loop the playback.

The Timeline and Effects Manager both have a playback cursor that allows you to
shuttle through your clip. You can either opt to lock the two to have a better time
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 107

reference and synchronization between the Timeline and the Preview windows or
you can keep jog them independently.

To lock the Key Frame Controller cursor and Timeline cursor press .

Editing in the Preview Window

To achieve even more interactivity, you can
edit effects settings directly on the screen.
Moving paths and some of the video effects
allow this type of operation. To determine
whether a particular clip has the on-screen
editing controls look at the on-screen green
square handle icons in the Preview Window. If
you see them, the effect can be edited
interactively in the Preview Window.

Talking about the Moving Path effect in particular, you can reposition, resize or
rotate the clip right in the Preview Window.

To animate a Moving Path of a clip in Preview Window:

1. Open Preview Window and Effects Manager so they are both in your
workspace.
2. Apply Moving Path effect to your clip in timeline.
3. Select Moving Path in Effects Manager.
4. Click on the clip once in the Preview Window.
Green squares now appear in the window indicating the borders of the clip.
Each corner of the clip will also have yellow squares. If you click then hold-drag
on the green squares you would resize the clip in the direction of dragging.
Same operation on the yellow squares at the corners would transform the clip
disproportionally.
5. Move the playback cursor a second forward in the Effects Manager.

6. Click to set another keyframe.

7. Click again anywhere within the highlighted clip in the Preview Window then
drag it towards the lower right corner of the Preview Window.
8. Move the timeline playback cursor a second forward again.
108 VIDEO EDITOR

9. Double-click right under the blue playback cursor in the Effects Manager. A
red key frame is set at the current position in time.
10.Change position of the clip in Preview Window, set another keyframe.
11.Click on Play button either in Effects Manager or in the Preview Window.

You can also animate Moving Path in the Settings Area of Effects
Manager.

Resizing and rotation of clips as well as on-screen controls in other video effects
can all be animated in the same fashion.

Organizing effects
Once you set up your key frames on one effect, you can add more effects to the
clip and animate their properties in the same fashion.

Click or to add or remove effects in the Settings Area.

Press to enter the Options dialog box of a particular effect.

To disable an effect, press .

Drag on the slider to perform keyframe-timeline zooming.

 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 109

Overlay
Placing titles on a video is the simplest example of an overlay effect. An overlay
could also be a picture-in-picture effect over the anchor's shoulder on the nightly
news, or a lower-third graphic. Overlays are commonly superimposed over a
background video with portions of the overlay being transparent or keyed-out.
Overlay effects can only be performed on clips in the Video1-Video99 tracks,
which are collectively known as the Overlay tracks.

To create an image overlay effect:

1. Place a video clip onto the Video2 track.
2. Place another clip onto the Video1 track and line it up underneath the clip in
the Video2 track.

Lining up the clips

3. Click Clip: Overlay Options. (This command can

also be selected from the right click pop-up menu.)
The Overlay Options dialog box opens.
4. From the Type list, choose Color Key.
5. On the Overlay clip, click on an area that
represents the color you want to be transparent
with the Eyedropper.
6. Set the Similarity (range of colors to be
transparent) and Transparency (how strongly the Using the Eyedropper
visible image should appear). For more information
on setting key frames, see Using key frame
controls.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.
If your card supports an external monitor, you can watch this preview directly on
your television by selecting the External monitor button in the Overlay Options
dialog box.
110 VIDEO EDITOR

Overlay Options dialog box

To change overlay settings, select Clip: Overlay Options or right-click the clip
and then click Overlay Options from the pop-up menu.

1
2
8

10
3
11
4
5 12
6

7 13
14

1 Overlay clip shows the selected clip before applying the overlay settings.

2 Overlay preview shows the selected clip with the overlay applied.

3 Key frame controller allows you to precisely control how all effects are applied to
the clip.

4 Preview as selects the type of display to show in the Overlay preview window.

5 Type specifies the method used for choosing which part of the image is transparent.

6 Mask selects whether to use a video or image file as the source for the overlay.

7 Color (RGB) sets the color to be transparent.

8 Advanced control window displays a representation of the threshold, cutoff, max

value, min value, and gamma value parameters. Click any of the parameter handles
and drag to adjust.

9 Play in Preview Window or External Monitor outputs the results in Video Edi-
tor's Preview and/or an external monitor.

10 Preview Playback Options opens a dialog box where you can specify where to
preview the filter/effect.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 111

11 Blend/Opacity controls how much of the overlay clip blends with the underlying
clip.

12 Transparency specifies how faded the overlaying clip appears.

13 Similarity specifies the range of key colors, relative to the selected one, to be
transparent.

14 Soft edge softens the transition's edges.

• If you select Color Key from the Type list, you have two options in choosing
a key color. You can click on the color box to choose the color to be
transparent using the Ulead Color Picker (you can also right-click the box to
choose from the Windows Color Picker) or you can click on a color in the
Overlay clip with the Eyedropper tool. The latter method is probably the
easier.

• In the Preview as list, you have three options. The Result option shows
you the applied overlay. The FG Only option displays just the overlay clip
with the underlying clip replaced by a solid color. The Mask option displays
the transparent areas of the overlay in white and the opaque areas in black.
(The foreground clip is sometimes referred to as the Mask.)

• Adjust the Similarity slider a higher percentage to set more colors to be

made transparent.

• Opacity works with all types except Alpha Channel, Gray Key and Blue
Screen.

Overlay key types

When you create an overlay effect, the Overlay Options dialog box allows you to
select from a number of overlay types in the Type list. There are two main types
you can choose from: color-based and mixed-based. Color-based types, such
as Color, Luma, Chroma, Gray Key and Blue Screen, all work by making a
specified key color transparent. (These types also allow you to control the
Similarity and Transparency of the effect.) Mixed-based types, such as Multiply,
Add, Subtract, and Difference, determine how the overlaying and underlying clips
merge with each other by comparing the color value differences between each clip.
(These types only allow you to control the Opacity of the effect.) Mixed-based
types can also be easily identified as they work on the entire clip and you cannot
specify a key color in the Overlay clip of the preview window. This is a rather
complicated topic: please see the Help for more specific information about each of
these types of keys.
112 VIDEO EDITOR

One of the most common and useful overlay key types is the Blue Screen. The
following procedure is a simple example of how to use a Blue Screen effect in
Video Editor. The primary factor in determining the success of a Blue Screen effect
is in the actual filming and not in post production. If you have a good solid colored
screen and uniform lighting, creating a Blue Screen effect is easy. If you do not
have either of these things, it is nearly impossible to get a clean overlay.

To use a blue screen effect in an overlay:

1. Insert the video clip that you want to be in the background into the Video1
track.
2. Insert a video clip shot with a blue screen in the background into Video2 track.
3. Right-click on the overlay clip (the blue screen clip) and select Overlay
Options. The Overlay Options dialog box opens up.
4. Click on the Type list and select Blue Screen.
5. Click the Eyedropper on the blue portion of the clip in the Overlay clip box.
6. The underlying clip will appear behind the overlay clip, in the blue screen areas
and in the Overlay preview box. (If the blue screen is not totally replaced by
the underlying clip, increase the Similarity value.)
7. Click OK and preview the clip.

Understanding Alpha Channels

One of the most powerful methods of creating transparent overlays involves using
Alpha Channels. This technical term simply means an area or areas of an image
that have been selected to be transparent in an image or video. In many ways, an
Alpha Channel is the same as a color key and could be based on a color in a clip.
Many image editing programs allow you to create and save Alpha Channels and it
is the technique employed by CG Infinity to control transparency. TGA and TIF
image files both support Alpha Channel transparency and make excellent overlays.
Because you can control the level of transparency with 256 levels of gray, Alpha
Channels are also used in Video Paint anytime you use a matte, as well as in
transition effects such as wipes and dissolves. Most overlays in MediaStudio Pro
take advantage of Alpha Channel. Because this is such a powerful and effective
technique, it is always recommended that you insert your CG Infinity project files
directly into Video Editor (instead of rendering first and then inserting the resulting
AVI file) and use the Alpha Channel for the overlay.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 113

To use an Alpha Channel in an overlay:

1. Place a video clip into the Video1 track.
2. Place a video clip which was created with an
alpha Channel (for example, a CG Infinity file)
into the Video2 track.
3. Right-click on the clip in Video2 and select
Overlay Options to open up the Overlay
Options dialog box.
4. In the Type drop-down box, select Alpha
Channel.

At this point, the areas specified in the channel are

immediately keyed out. If the preview image does
not change, then the overlay clip does not contain
an Alpha Channel. Click OK.

1. Background clip
2. Alpha channel
3. Overlay clip
4. Result

Using Gamma correction

Gamma refers to the gray values of a color which contribute to the levels of
highlight and shading that appear in an image. The Gamma graph is a visual guide
which allows you to change these values and thus affect changes in the highlights
and shadows, as well as change the midrange or midtone values. If you move the
gamma value higher up the graph, you darken the clip whereas moving it lower
lightens it. You can move the thumbtacks that appear along both the X and Y axis
to give you better control over which highlights and shadows are affected. The Y
axis thumbtacks represent the possible changes you can make to the grays of the
original clip. The X axis thumbtacks work similarly except they restrict you to
changing only the midtone grays of the original clip, leaving the areas with strong
highlights and shadows untouched.
114 VIDEO EDITOR

Working with mattes

Another feature of the Overlay Options dialog box is that it allows you to make
use of mattes (or masks). In the film world, mattes work like color keying in that
they show and hide various areas of the overlay clip. You can make any image or
video file into a matte or you can create these yourself in a paint program such as
Video Paint or in CG Infinity.

Creating image and video mattes

Image mattes are great when you want to specify a particular area in the frame for
a video to appear and need to get the cleanest possible blend when overlaying.

To create an image matte:

1. Run your favorite image editing software,
such as Ulead PhotoImpact (Ulead Video
Paint or CG Infinity can also be used), and
create a rectangle the same size as the
frames in your video project.
2. Draw an area where you want the video to
appear, such as a circle or a square.
3. Fill this area with a solid color (like blue) and then fill the background with a
contrasting color (like green).
4. Load this image into a video track (Video1).
5. Right-click on the image and select Overlay Options.
6. Select the Color Key from the Type list and click in the blue area. The blue
area is then keyed out to reveal the underlying clip.

When preparing an image or video for color keying, use a solid color as the
background, such as blue. Do not use black or white as these colors tend to
"bleed" into the overlay clip.

Video mattes are simply multiple image mattes spread out over multiple frames.
These can be commonly created in many animation programs.

To create a video matte:

1. Create a sequence of images, such as a Targa animation (TGA).
2. Insert them into Video Editor as a Ulead Image Sequence. (If you have Ulead
Video Paint, you can also insert a Video Paint project file).
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 115

3. Load it into the Overlay Options dialog box and specify which color to key
out.

When using video or image mattes, you can see the file name of the matte
you are using beside the Mask field in the dialog box.

Using Grayscale mattes

Mattes are generally comprised of two solid colors that make it easier to identify
which areas to show and which to hide. For greater control, you can use a
Grayscale matte, which works by using a gradient transparency as a matte where
the level of transparency directly corresponds to the level of gray. For example,
lighter grays will be more transparent than darker grays, with pure white being
100% transparent and black being completely opaque. Using Grayscale mattes in
this way gives you much greater control over how clips merge and blend with each
other. To use a Grayscale matte, just load a black and white matte like you would
an image matte, but then choose the Gray Key Type.

Background Foreground Grayscale matte Result

Applying video filters

Video Editor has a wide range of special effects and filters that allow you to
enhance and improve existing video clips as well as create exciting attention
grabbing effects. You can apply a Video Filter by dragging its thumbnail from the
Video Filter gallery of the Production Library onto a clip.

Each clip may have up to 20 filters applied at one time.

116 VIDEO EDITOR

To apply a video filter:

1. Select the video clip you want to apply the filter to.
2. Click Clip: Video Filters [Ctrl + D] to open the Video Filters dialog box or
right-click and select Video Filters from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the filter you want to apply from the Available filters list box and click
Add. The filter is moved to the Applied filters list box.
4. Click Region to select which frames you want the video filter(s) to be applied
to in your video. Click OK to return to the Video Filter dialog box.
5. Click OK. The Video Filters dialog box closes and the filter is applied to the
clip.
If you regularly use the same filter, you can define its default attributes by
double-clicking its thumbnail in the Video Filter gallery of the Production
Library. This opens the Video Filter Options dialog box for that filter, which you
can then edit to change the default.
There are dozens of filters available with limitless variety. These filters can be
mixed and matched and customized to get just the right results.

Video filter samples

Cloud Colored Pen

Lens Flare Step Motion

 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 117

To fine-tune a video filter:

1. Right-click a selected clip with a previously added video filter and select Video
Filters.
2. Click the Options button to view the filter and change its attributes. When you
click Options, a dialog box opens displaying two windows: Original, with the
selected video clip, and Preview, which shows the result after application of
the filter.
3. Change the various filter attributes until you get the result you want.
Remember to adjust both the start and end attributes by clicking on the key
frames.
The Video Filters dialog box varies according to the selected filter. For details about
the specifics of each filter, click the Help button in that particular filter dialog box.
All of the filter dialog boxes contain the Original clip window, the Preview
window, and the Add button.

Video Filter Options dialog box (Monochrome)

Original Clip window shows a frame
from the selected clip before the
filter is applied.

Add opens the Add To Library

dialog box to add the current effect
settings to the Video Filter's
Custom folder for quick access.

Preview window shows a frame

from the clip after the filter has
been applied

The options located here at the

bottom of the dialog box will vary
from filter to filter.

Like many other effects, video filters can also be animated using key frames. This
is a great way to have the original video clip gradually transform to the altered
look of an applied filter, or vice versa. The following procedure uses the Colored
Pen filter to gradually transform what seems like a drawn image into the real-life
look of ordinary video.
118 VIDEO EDITOR

To animate a video filter:

1. Select a clip and open the Video Filters dialog box as previously described.
2. Select the Colored Pen filter from the Available filters box and click the Add
button. The Colored Pen filter will now appear in the Applied filters box.
3. Click the Options button to open the Colored Pen dialog box.
4. Click on the first key frame diamond and then drag the Level slider to 80.
5. Click on the last key frame diamond and drag the Level slider to 0.
6. Click OK and preview the effect.

Colored Pen level set Using key frames to Colored Pen level set
to 80 at the first key animate a Colored to 0 at the last key
frame Pen video filter frame

Applying a regional matte to a video filter

When you apply a video filter it affects the entire frame of a video clip. There may
be times however when you would prefer it to only affect a certain portion of the
clip, such as a highlighted area or a specific scene in the background. You can do
this by first creating an image or video matte (see “Creating image and video
mattes” on page 114) and then loading the matte into the Video Filters dialog box.
See the next page for details.

Original clip Image matte Combined result

If you do not have a matte to use then specifying a region has little benefit.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 119

To apply a regional matte:

1. Open the Video Filters dialog box and place the filter you want to work with in
the Applied filters list box.
2. Click the Region button to open the Region dialog box (not available for all
filters).
3. Select an option from the Mask drop-down list to determine what kind of matte
you want to use.
4. Move the Threshold slider to control the degree of the effect. You can also
choose to invert the area being affected by selecting the Invert option.
5. Click OK to return to the Video Filters dialog box.

Region dialog box

2 7

3 10
4 11
5 12
6

1 Mask window shows a frame from the mask.

2 Preview window shows a frame from the selected clip and the parts affected by the
filter.

3 Type drop-down box lets you select the key type to use in the Mask window.

4 Mask drop-down box lets you select the kind of matte to use.

5 Enable filter (start position) enables the filter applied to the clip starting from
the current position.
120 VIDEO EDITOR

6 Threshold slider determines the sensitivity to bright and dark pixels.

7 Matte opens the Select Image Matte dialog box.

8 Preview Playback Options opens a dialog box where you can specify where to
preview the filter/effect.

9 Play in Preview Window or External Monitor outputs the results in Video Edi-
tor's Preview and/or an external monitor.

10 Invert region area makes all colors except the selected color the key color.

11 RGB displays the RGB values of the current threshold setting.

12 Enable mask (start position) enables the mask applied to the filter starting from
the current position.

Video enhancement filters

There is no such thing as perfection. Although modern digital camcorders use high
dynamic range CCD and CMOS imagers and advanced algorithms for processing
your shots, you still need to adjust a number of settings on your video equipment.
Sometimes, there is no time for that so the footage gets either under- or
overexposed, has bad color representation or both.
Thus, Enhance Lighting and Color Correction tools become valuable
instruments you can use to perform a number of color-related adjustments.

Enhance Lighting Tool

Enhance Lighting is a video filter for exposure control in underexposed or
overexposed footage. There are two controls in the dialog box: Fill Light and
Enhance Shadows.

Fill light adds light to the image's darker areas to improve the lighting on
underexposed images.

Enhance shadow enhances the shadow on the image's highlighted areas to

improve the lighting of overexposed images.

To apply the Enhance Lightning filter:

1. In the Timeline, select a clip on which the filter will be applied.
2. Click Clip: Video Filters.
3. In the Video Filters dialog box, select Enhance Lightning from the
Available filters to the left.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 121

4. Click Add then click Options, adjust the Fill light and Enhance shadow
settings in Enhance Lightning dialog box clicking Options button.
5. Click OK.

Color Correction Tool

The basic principle behind color correction is adjusting Highlight, Midtone and
Shadow across Red, Green and Blue channels of your digital images or movies.

What it means is that you will need to carefully ration the amount of each color in
bright, midtone and dark image areas. To do just that you can rely on the program
itself and perform Automatic color correction or you can tweak settings manually
selecting a reference color in the source clip and moving the control point to a
destination color.

There are three different methods of color correcting: adjusting gray scale levels
(Levels), working with Hue, Saturation and Lightness (HSL) wheel or editing
Curves.

To color correct with Levels:

1. In the Timeline, select a clip on which the filter will be applied.
2. Click Clip: Video Filters.
3. In Video Filters dialog box, select Color Correction from Available filters to
the left.
4. Click Add>> then click Options.
5. In the Color Correction Tool dialog box, make sure Levels tab is active and
then click the Master button. This will select all pixels across the tonal range
for adjustment as opposed to selecting only bright (Highlights), medium tone
(Midtones) and dark (Shadows) pixels.

6. Click to collectively select the RGB channels or click on each corresponding

channel to perform adjustments.
7. Adjust the horizontal Input tonal values with either leftmost black point slider,
rightmost white point slider or the middle grayscale slider. Be careful not to
reduce the dynamic range of the image remapping the image tonal range. If
you rather do wish to reduce the overall tone, consider shifting the black or
white threshold limits with the Vertical Output tonal slider. Preview the
difference.
8. To adjust Highlights, Midtones and Shadows separately, click on each
corresponding button to the left of the Levels graph.
122 VIDEO EDITOR

To speed up things, use the three eyedropper tools. From left to right they are
- black eyedropper, gray eyedropper and white eyedropper. Selecting the
black eyedropper and clicking with it on relatively bright parts of the image
will remap these bright values towards the darker black tones. Gray
eyedropper will neutralize the clicked areas while white eyedropper will remap
the selected pixels to brighter values.

Color correcting selected regions

Color correcting custom selected regions in your video is one of the powerful
features in Color Correction Tool. You can base your selections on a particular
color or a range of colors shrinking or growing the selected area.

To color correct a selection:

1. Select the Region Selection option.
2. Click on a bright spot anywhere in the left original preview window with the
eyedropper.
3. Drag the Similarity slider to the left to reduce the number of colors in the
selection. Drag it to the right to include more similar colors.
4. Adjust the Feather slider to achieve the desired result.
5. Shrink or expand your selection with the Shrink/Expand slider.
6. Your selection is ready. You can color correct it as described earlier in the
manual correction procedure.

Color correcting with the HSL wheel

As an alternative to the Levels, you might find it a lot more suitable to color correct
by adjusting Hue, Saturation and Luminance values. Hue is the color, Saturation
is the amount of color, and Luminance determines how bright your video is. HSL
moves or shifts hues and lightness linearly, you can either use slider controls or
the HSL color wheel to remap the values.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 123

Color wheel gives you direct interactive control over the hue and saturation
parameters. Either drag the black horizontal ruler on the wheel or use the slider to
adjust the saturation first then click-drag on the outer circle of the wheel to select
the color. Click-dragging on the wheel is equal to adjusting the Hue Shift control.

• Hue shift changes the color in a linear fashion sliding through the spectrum.

• Gamma determines the total number of colors.

• Gain multiplies your pixels with a higher (brighter) value, boosting the colors.

• Saturation sets the intensity of color.

• Contrast sets the amount of contrast in image.

• Luminance alters the overall brightness.

Color correcting with Curves

Editing curves is the most straight-forward color correction approach. It allows you
to directly remap the tonal values in the video or any channel of the video. The
most important thing to remember while working with curves is the X and Y axis
relation. The horizontal axis represents current values of the pixels in the video
from 1 to 256. The vertical axis represents tonal values in the video.

Thus, choosing the right slope of your curve is crucial for the quality of your color
correction. It might seem a little confusing first, but as you experiment you will
love curves for their efficiency.

To adjust curves:
1. In the Color Correction Tool dialog box, click Curves to access the controls.
2. Click on one of the color channels button to select a particular channel for color
correction, or click the Master button to color correct all three RGB channels.
3. Draw a curve in the curve window.
124 VIDEO EDITOR

Color correcting all RGB values at once is rarely an option among the
professionals. If you choose this option, you may destroy your video reducing
the tonal values. Choose to correct one channel at a time for a more
professional result.

Global filters
The Global filters feature allows you to select a number of video filters to apply to
your whole project.

To use global filters:

1. Select Project: Project Settings.
2. In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Global Filters button.
3. In the Video Filters dialog box, select the video filters you want to apply to your
whole project.
4. Click OK.

Creating a moving path

One of the more advanced effects of Video Editor is its ability to generate a
moving path. A moving path controls the motion of a clip across the screen. You
can apply moving path effects to several clips orchestrating complex dynamic
interactions between the clips. For example, you can have one clip zigzag its way
across another and spin away into the distance. Moving paths can be applied to
any clip in the video overlay tracks, and are most commonly used with title clips,
still image elements and animated image sequences and objects created with CG
Infinity.

To create a 2D basic moving path:

1. Open the Production Library and select the 2D Basic folder in the Moving
Path tree.
2. Drag the 2D Basic thumbnail onto target clip.
3. Open Effects Manager; Moving Path controls are displayed in the manager
after you select 2D Basic Moving Path from the upper left pane.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 125

4. Click the Start control point (S) in the Motion Control window and drag the
sample clip to the position where you want the clip to begin its movement.

Start control point End control point

5. Click the End control point (E) in the Motion Control window and drag the
sample clip to the position where you want the clip to end its movement.
6. Click the Play button to preview the moving path.

Creating a simple 2D basic moving path

By default, dragging any of the Moving Path thumbnails from the Production
Library will not open its window automatically. To make it pop up every time
you drag this and other effects onto a clip in timeline, click in the Display
Options dialog box check box in the Preferences: General tab.

Moving Path dialog box

1 Motion Control Window allows you to determine the path a clip takes.

2 Key frame Controller determines where key frames are placed.

3 Zoom opens the zoom window magnifying the Motion Control window.

4 Restore changes the clip's dimensions back to its original size.

5 Actual Image replaces the preview clip in the Motion Control window with thumb-
nails of the clip.

6 Width and Height boxes define the frame dimensions of the actual clip.

7 Keep aspect ratio ensures that any changes to a clip's dimensions are reflected
equally in the Width and Height boxes.
126 VIDEO EDITOR

1
9

10
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
8

8 Interpolate frame size with logarithm converts the moving path from linear
interpolation to logarithmic interpolation solving zoom quality problems that occurs
when the size of the image is changed over its duration.

9 Preview allows you to display the moving path before actually applying it.

10 Show Background displays the background clip in the frame window.

11 Speed determines the speed of the preview.

12 Play performs a preview of the moving path.

13 Preview Playback Options opens a dialog box where you can specify where to
preview the filter/effect.

14 External Monitor previews on an external monitor.

15 Title Safe Area displays guidelines around the frame box representing the viewable
area on a television.

16 Reference point box allows you to change the position of the sample clip.

17 X and Y determine the actual position of the clip within the frame box.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 127

• The Motion Control window allows you to determine the path of a clip by
adjusting various control points. When you first open a Moving Path dialog
box, the Start control point (S) is active and appears at the center of a
sample of the clip. By dragging the start control point, you can reposition the
clip. To reposition the End control point (E), click it to make it active and then
drag it to a new location. If you use the Key frame Controller, you can add
additional control points (+) which give you more options for controlling the
direction of the path. Beneath the sample clip is a fixed frame which
represents the frame size of the video project. If your moving path does not
appear within this frame, then it will not be seen in the resulting video
sequence.

• The Reference box allows you to change the position of the control point
within the sample clip, thereby controlling which part of the clip moves first,
as well as the axis of any rotations (except for Sphere and Cylinder) – by
default this is set to the center. For example, clicking the top left corner
changes the focus of the active key frame on the sample clip in the Motion
Control window to the top left corner of the clip. This is particularly useful
when you need to reposition a clip but are restricted by the size of the
Motion Control window, such as for long title credits. By switching the
reference of the clip to the top, you can then drag the sample clip outside of
the frame box and beyond the area of the window.

• The Zoom button opens the Zoom window which displays the Motion Control
window in greater magnification. A green frame also appears in the Motion
Control window indicating the current area displayed in the Zoom window.
(By moving this frame, you change the area being examined.) You can
increase the zoom level (up to 4x) by clicking the Zoom window (to zoom out
right-click). With the Zoom window open, you can still work on your moving
path by dragging the control points in the Motion Control window. Double-
click the title bar to close the Zoom window.

Most of these controls will be available in the Effects Manager:Moving Path

that will be opened after you drag the Moving Path thumbnail onto the clip in
timeline.

In Video Editor, you can choose from six distinct moving paths: 2D Basic, 2D
Advanced, 3D, Cylinder, Sphere and Picture in Picture (you can also
customize your own paths in the custom folder). You can access Moving Path
controls in two different places within the program. Either right-click on the clip
and choose Moving Path from the pop-up menu or click to open the Effects
Manager. Selecting the clip in the timeline then clicking on the Moving Path will
open up the controls.

You can set the motion parameters in the Effects Manager or create an animated
motion path interactively in the Preview Window.
128 VIDEO EDITOR

To create a moving path in the Preview Window:

1. Select the clip to be animated in the timeline.
2. Drag the 2D Basic Moving Path onto the clip from Production Library:
Moving Path folder.
3. Open Effects Manager. Open up the Preview Window and place it next to
the Effects Manager.
4. Click the Start control point (S) in the Motion Control window within the
Effects Manager. In the Preview Window, drag on the clip surrounded by
the green squares; position the clip where you want it to begin the movement.
5. Click the End control point (E) in the Motion Control window within the
Effects Manager. In the Preview Window, drag on the clip surrounded by
the green squares; position the clip where you want it to begin the movement.
6. Click the Play button to preview the moving path.

Click on the yellow squares across the clip’s borders to distort it non-
proportionally.

One common use for the 2D Basic Moving Path is to fix clips in a motionless
position within another clip boundaries. You can often see this technique in live
broadcasts, advertisement reels and news. This effect can be done easily in Video
Editor. You can think of it as a still moving path.

To create a still moving path:

A still moving path

1. Drag a clip into the Video1 track: this is the background (the anchor).
2. Drag a clip into the Video2 track: this is the overlay.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 129

3. Drag a 2D Basic moving path onto the clip in the Video2 track. Open the
Effects Manager.
4. Click the Keep aspect ratio box in the middle left corner.
5. Change the Width value to 100 (the Height value automatically changes to
keep the ratio).
6. Change the X value to 240, and the Y value to 70 (this moves the center of
the overlay to the upper right).
7. Click on the End control point and repeat steps 5 and 6, entering exactly the
same values.
8. Preview the effect.

The 2D Advanced Moving Path dialog box is similar to the 2D Basic Moving
Path except that you can rotate a clip around its central point and distort it.

To create a 2D advanced moving path:

1. Select the 2D Advanced thumbnail from the Moving Path gallery and drag it
onto a clip.
2. Enter a rotation value, or drag the rotation dial to the desired value.
3. Use the handles in the Distortion box to slant the clip to create perspective
effects
4. Click the Play button to preview. Click OK to apply.

If you resize a clip, its contents are resampled accordingly. Depending on the
type of clip, this may produce degradation in image quality.

Creating 3D moving paths

Creating a 3D moving path, whether it is a simple 3D path, a sphere, or a cylinder,
is much the same procedure as creating a 2D moving path. The third dimension
simply consists of additional rotation angles. Sphere and Cylinder help you
control a 3D path by providing an object around which the clip can rotate.

When using a Sphere or Cylinder Moving Path, their respective dialog boxes have
options for controlling the behavior of the path and the clip itself. For example, if
you select the Clip Angle (in the Adjust combo box), you can adjust the rotation
of the clip on the surface of the sphere or cylinder; rotation values can be entered
using the rotation dial, the plus/minus [+/-] buttons, or the entry boxes. The X
130 VIDEO EDITOR

and Y coordinates determine the placement of the sphere or cylinder in reference

to the center of the video window, whereas the Angle and Y values (Angle 1, and
Angle 2 in the sphere dialog box) rotate the sphere/cylinder vertically or
horizontally into the third dimension. You can also rotate or resize the sphere or
cylinder with the Rotate and Radius entry boxes.

3D Moving Path

Managing key frames on a moving path

Animation is performed by smoothly calculating the position of an object between
key frames. The more key frames that are added, the more flexibility and control
you have over the animation. This is true for moving paths in Video Editor. You can
also control the speed of a moving path by adjusting the distance between key
frames.

To change the direction of a moving path:

1. Drag-and-drop the 2D Basic thumbnail from the Moving Path gallery onto a
clip in an overlay track.
2. Select Moving Path from a pop-up window right-clicking on the clip.
3. Drag the Start control point (S) in the Motion Control window to the top left
corner of the of the fixed project frame.
4. Drag the Preview slider in the Key frame Controller halfway between the start
and end key frames.

5. Click Add Key frame and drag the red square (the new control point) to
the bottom of the fixed project frame.
6. Drag the End control point (E) in the Motion Control window to the top right
of the fixed project frame.

Now watch the preview. The clip should descend from the top left corner to the
bottom of the screen, and then bounce up and ascend to the top right corner.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 131

To change the speed of a moving path:

1. Click on the middle red diamond on the Key frame Controller.
2. Drag it closer to the start key frame
3. Preview and click OK to apply.
The descent of the clip is accelerated because it has to move the same distance in
a shorter time. The ascent of the clip is slowed down because it has more time to
move the same distance.

Inserting an image with moving path attributes

When you insert an image file into a video track in Video Editor, the image will be
stretched to fit the frame dimensions of your project. This will cause a distortion in
the image. To avoid this problem, select Keep original size with moving path
automatically in the Insert Image File dialog box.

When you apply a moving path attribute to the image file that you have just
inserted, the image file will be stretched to fit the dimensions of your project. To
maintain the original size of your image, you have to change the Width and
Height in the dialog box of the moving path you have selected.

Applying audio filters

Video Editor also allows you to apply audio filters to audio clips. They allow you to
do everything from increasing a clip’s amplification, to removing noise, to applying
special effects such as fades and echoes. In addition, MediaStudio Pro supports
third party DirectX Audio plug-ins. You can apply an Audio Filter by dragging
its thumbnail from the Audio Filter gallery of the Production Library onto an
audio clip.

After applying the filters to audio, you can preview the changes on the timeline
immediately while still adjusting the parameters. You can also specify the starting
point for preview.

Each clip may have up to 20 filters applied at one time.

132 VIDEO EDITOR

To apply an audio filter:

1. Select the audio clip you want to apply the filter to.
2. Click the Audio Filters button or Clip: Audio Filters or right-click the clip and
select Audio Filters from the pop-up menu. Open Audio Filters dialog box.
3. Select the filter you want to apply from the Available filters list and click Add.
The filter is moved to the Applied filters list.
4. Click the Options button to view the filter and change its attributes. (Every
filter has different options.)
5. Change the various filter attributes until you get the result you want. (The
options in this dialog box vary depending on the type of filter you are using.)
6. Click OK. The Audio Filters dialog box closes and the filter is applied to the clip.

Filling the left or right audio channel

With the Fill Left and Fill Right audio filters, you can copy audio from one
channel and paste it to the other channel in clips that contain stereo audio. This is
very useful when a clip incorporates two languages, with one from the left and the
other from the right channel and you want to have the same content for both
channels.

You can also create stereo files using just the mono source audio. All you will need
to do is copy it to both channels.

To apply the Fill Right/Left filter:

1. Select the audio file to be processed.

2. Select Clip:Audio Filters.

3. In the Audio Filters dialog box, select either Fill Left or Fill Right from the
Available Filters list.

4. Click Add>>.

5. Click OK.

One channel will then be automatically copied into the other.

 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 133

Removing vocals
You can apply the Vocal Reduction filter to remove the vocal from a sound track.

To remove vocal from audio:

1. Select the audio clip in the Timeline.
2. Select Clip: Audio Filters.
3. In the Audio Filters dialog box, select Vocal Reduction from the Available
Filters list.
4. Click Add>> then adjust the Strength and Vivid mode settings in the Vocal
Reduction dialog box.

Vocal removal or reduction is an art, and it has a trade-off. Usually, there are
musical instruments at the same pan location (position in the stereo sound
field) as the vocal to be removed. Vocal Reduction gives you control over how
much bass and treble music frequencies you keep that are at the same
location as the vocal.

Creating titles
Adding text to your video is essential in many situations. Titles often appear in the
beginning and at the end of the movies. You can also put titles along the action to
complement on-screen action.

Title clips are treated as any other media clip in your project. They can be altered
with any of the transformations and effects from MediaStudio arsenal.

To create a title clip:

1. Place any clip (video, image or color) into the Video1 track. This is the
background for your titles.
2. Click Insert: Insert Title Clip (alternatively, right-click anywhere in Timeline
and select Title Clip from the drop-down dialog box).
3. Double-click the text editing area in the upper right of the dialog box.
4. Type the text that you want in your title in the Title text box.
5. Adjust the settings in the left pane of the dialog to achieve the desired look and
apply animation.
134 VIDEO EDITOR

There are two main parts in the left pane of Insert Title Clip dialog box: Title
Settings and Text Settings.
• Clip Settings has parameters that control the arrangement and duration
of text in your project. It also allows you to choose a background color;
• Text Settings deal with numerous advanced parameters like text color,
shadow, alignment, border, font type and size and many other.
The right pane of the Insert Title Clip dialog box has a text preview window at
the top and Title Style, Animation and Effect tabs at the bottom. To apply any
of those, simply click on your text in the text editing area then click on any of
the preset thumbnails from the window below.
6. Specify the format for the text in the Font tab. Settings here affect the whole
text in the Title text box.
7. Select Anti-aliasing for smooth text.
8. Click the Animation tab to apply moving effects to your clip. Click-select a
thumbnail from the Animation Gallery.
9. You can also apply particle effects such snow, fire, glass, and metal in the Type
Effect tab. Click-select a thumbnail from the Type Effect.
10. Click OK and place the clip into overlaying Video2 on the Timeline.

• After typing your text, click the save button for later editing or spell
checking.

• To load a previously saved text file (TXT), click the load button . The size
of the text file should not exceed 5 KB.
 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 135

Insert Title Clip dialog box

Clip settings

2
3
4
5

Text settings

Clip settings
• Duration sets the length of your title in the Timeline.

• Motion determines title animation type - rolling or crawling.

• Title text lets you create a new title, load a *.TXT text file and save titles as a file.

• Background color allows you to choose a solid color or transparency for

background.

• Transparency sets background transparent.

• Solid choose a fully opaque color from the box to the left.

• Load file loads a previously created text file (*.TXT file extension) for the Title text.

• Save file saves the title as a text file for future use.

• Title text window provides a display of the text for the clip.
136 VIDEO EDITOR

Text settings
• Line spacing determines the space between lines of text.

• Font name & size select face and size for the characters you want to place in the
project

• Vertical text toggles between making the text's orientation vertical or horizontal.

• Anti-aliasing smooths the text.

• Fill text color fills your text with a Solid color or a Gradient of two colors.

• Border activates border on text. Specify Width and Color of the text edges.

• Outer stroke toggles stroke on text edges on and off.

• Text transparency sets the amount of transparency of the text in relation to its
background.

• Text soft edge alters the amount of edge halo.

• Shadow creates shadow on the text.

• Text color bar creates a solid color background bar along the type length.

• Show grid lines shows color lines on the text preview window.

• Alignment positions text to either the center of the text preview window or one of
its corners.

Preview window
1 Preview window displays a preview of the title text and provides button controls
for playing the title clip. The thin grey line box is the Title-safe area indicator. It is
recommended that your title stays within the area inside this box.

2 Preview slider and button controls Drag the slider to see how the title clip
progresses. Click the button controls to advance forward/backward by one frame or
jump to the start/end of the clip.

3 Play in Preview Window or External Monitor outputs the results in Video Edi-
tor's Preview and/or an external monitor.

4 Preview Playback Options opens a dialog box where you can specify where to
preview the filter/effect.

5 Show/Hide safe area in Preview Window Toggles between showing and hiding
the title-safe area box.

6 Play Click to play the title clip in the preview window.

 CHAPTER 4: ADDING EFFECTS AND TITLES 137

• If the width of your text in the Preview window exceeds the frame size, you
need to reduce the size of the font or add a new line. To start a new line,
press [ENTER].

• If you want to load a title from a text file, make sure that the size of the file
does not exceed 5KB.

• Right-clicking any of the color boxes in Video Editor allows you to use the
Windows color picker.

Effects & Animation window

• Title Style tab displays a thumbnail preview of the selected animation type.
• Animation tab choose from a list of available preset animation types effects
that you can apply to your text. Click Customize to change the settings of the
selected effect.
• Type Effect tab allows you to choose the available type effects from the drop
down list.

• You can perform a far greater range of movement if you incorporate the title
clip with a moving path effect. (See “Creating a moving path” on page 124
for details on moving paths).

• When trimming rolling text, you can either prolong its duration or decrease
it.
138 VIDEO EDITOR
 5

AUDIO MIXING

Video Editor features a professional way of audio processing through the

Audio Mixing Panel.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Audio Mixing Panel

Grouping audio tracks
Modifying volume in real-time
140 VIDEO EDITOR

Audio Mixing Panel

This panel allows you to do audio mixing by adjusting Volume Fader and Pan/
Balance controls. Because this panel can be floated, you can adjust audio settings
while listening to them or viewing the videos. It consists of Volume Fader, Pan/
Balance Control and VU Meter for each audio track, which is numbered according
to the corresponding audio track in the Timeline. You can also make 2 or more
audio tracks share the same settings by grouping them and then switching the
Audio Mixing Panel to the Group Layout mode. For more information, see
“Grouping audio tracks” on page 142.

Play the last playback Clear Automation Mute

Play Preview Range
Rewind Repeat Option Apply Solo
Master Mode

Play / Pause

ID
Mixer Volume
Pan / Balance Device Control
Auto Read
Decibel
Auto Write
Indicator
Volume Fader

Master Volume
VU Meter Fader

Audio Mixing Panel

Audio Mixing Panel controls:

Play/Pause plays all the audio clips in the Timeline instantly. Once pressed, the
button changes to Pause. If you click Pause, the video clip stops at the current
frame and the button returns to Play.

Play the preview range plays only the clips covered in the preview area.

Play the last playback plays the range of the previous playback.

Rewind rewinds the audio file depending on the time selected.

 CHAPTER 5: AUDIO MIXING 141

Repeat plays all the clips in the Timeline instantly and continuously.

Options displays other audio settings that you can apply when doing audio
mixing.

ID specifies the track or group number for both Track and Group Layout.

Solo monitors a single track and temporarily mutes all other tracks where this
option is disabled.

Mute temporarily converts the audio track to silent. This allows you to listen to
other tracks while doing audio mixing.

Pan / Balance allows you to pan a monophonic clip or balance a stereo clip.

Volume Fader controls the loudness of the audio clips in a track. Dragging the
slider increases and decreases the volume.

Decibel (dB) Indicator displays the volume level in decibel unit (dB). The dB
indicator ranges from +12 to -36. 0 represents the original, unadjusted volume of
the audio stream. +12 indicates the topmost level while -36 is almost silent.

VU Meter displayed on the left side of the Decibel indicator. It displays how loud
or silent an audio clip is. If the meter reaches the peak level and changes to Red
color, it is recommended to lower the volume fader to avoid clipping.

Audio mixing process gives you two modes in modifying volume controls in real
time, Auto Read and Auto Write.

Auto Read reads the settings you made to Volume Fader and Pan/Balance
controls then uses these data to control the audio level of the track during
playback. This option only reads the modified settings but does not change the
original audio settings of the audio clip.

Auto Write reads and then records the adjustments made to the audio settings.
The original settings will be replaced by the new data specified in Volume Fader
and Pan/Balance controls. There are three modes to do Auto Write process, you
can access these modes by clicking Options: Auto Write.

Mixer Volume Device Control adjusts volume of your sound card. Dragging the
pointer to the left decreases the volume of your sound card while dragging the
pointer to your right increases the volume of your sound card.
142 VIDEO EDITOR

Master VU Meter displays two VU meters representing sound mixing

for left and right channels.

Master Volume Fader drag to control the overall volume level of the
mixed audio output.

Apply applies new adjustments made in Volume Fader and Pan/

Balance controls to the Timeline audio tracks.

Clear Automation clears the auto write process stored in the

memory.

Located at the right side of the Audio Mixing Panel is the Master Mixer.
It consists of two controls to help you adjust the overall volume output
of your system's sound card. Instead of switching to Windows Volume Control, you
can adjust the volume here by simply dragging the sliders of the Master Volume
Fader or regulate the output to your speakers by adjusting the Mixer Volume
Device.

Grouping audio tracks

When working with the Audio Mixing Panel, you can make multiple tracks share
one audio setting by grouping them together. We call this the "Mixing down"
process. Instead of adjusting the audio settings of a track and then playing again
to modify other tracks, here you can simply group the preferred tracks to share
one audio setting.

The Audio Mixing Panel has two working layouts, Track and Group Layout. When
you switch to Group Layout, the ID switches according to the number of groups
you have specified in the Group Tree dialog box. When you group audio tracks
and select Group Layout, the panel will display the four audio tracks, but when
you adjust the audio settings, the changes will also reflect on the track that is
included in the group.

To group audio tracks:

1. After inserting audio clips to the Timeline, click Window: Audio Mixing Panel
to do audio mixing.
2. The Track Layout is the default layout of the panel. To group preferred tracks,
click Options: Group Tree Setting.
3. In the Group Tree dialog box, select the tracks you want to group first. You
can do this by holding [ctrl] while selecting the tracks.
 CHAPTER 5: AUDIO MIXING 143

4. Click Group to include the selected tracks to the first group. Then repeat step 3
to group other tracks. You may undo grouping by clicking Ungroup.
5. Click OK to apply group settings.
6. To switch the Audio Mixing Panel to Group Layout, click Options: Layout -
Group. The number of columns displayed in the Audio Mixing Panel will depend
on the number of groups you have specified.

You can still work in Track Layout even if you have grouped audio tracks.
The settings of the tracks in a group will be the same even if you modify only
one track in a group.

Modifying volume in real-time

With the Audio Mixing Panel, you can manipulate audio track levels and Pan/
Balance tracks in real-time while listening to the audio track.

To mix and adjust audio track volume levels:

1. Select the point where you want to begin the adjustment.
2. Select Window: Audio Mixing Panel.
3. Find the corresponding audio track you want to edit in the Audio Mixing Panel.
The track name appears at the top of each mixer track.
4. Click Auto Write directly below the track name where you want to apply the
automation process.
5. Click Options: Auto Write on the upper right side of the Audio Mixing Panel.
Select one of the following modes:
• Select Default to edit the saved volume level and Pan/Balance data
without having to drag the controls during recording to begin the write
process. In this Auto Write mode, all previous adjustments in the audio
track will be erased. This is ideal if you want to keep a particular control
setting throughout a recording or if you want to write automation at the
start of playback.
• Select Dub to make adjustments by simply dragging the Volume Fader to
your desired level. This allows you to modify the saved volume level and
Pan/Balance data while dragging the Volume Fader and Pan/Balance
controls. Upon releasing the mouse button, the controls return to their
original position. This is ideal if you want to adjust a partial setting of an
audio clip from a certain position to another in real time.
144 VIDEO EDITOR

• Select Replacement to edit the saved volume level and Pan/Balance

data while dragging the Volume Fader and Pan/Balance controls. Although
similar in function with Dub, you do not need to keep on dragging the
Volume Fader to make adjustments for the audio clips. You only have to
drag the Volume Fader to your desired position and release the mouse
button. The controls shall remain in their modified positions.
6. Click Play in the Audio Mixing Panel to begin recording. Click Repeat to play
the program continuously or click Play the Preview Range to hear your
selected part of the track.
7. Drag the Volume Fader up to increase volume level or down to decrease
volume level.
8. Click Auto Read to prevent overwriting a previously applied automation.

You can still apply the changes you have made in the audio settings even
when Auto Read is activated by clicking Apply on the upper right corner
of the Audio Mixing Panel.

9. Drag the edit line towards the beginning and click Play to preview your
changes.
 6

DOLBY DIGITAL 5.1 SURROUND SOUND

With Dolby Digital 5.1, you have the top of audio technology as it stands
today. Unlike stereo stream that carries only two audio channels, Dolby
Surround delivers a whole lot more realism to your living room. It has five
separate audio channels encoded into one WAV or WMA stream delivered to
five speakers and one sub-woofer.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Working with Dolby Digital 5.1 in Video Editor

Surround sound hardware requirements
Setting up surround sound projects
Mixing Dolby Surround
Creating a surround sound audio file
146 VIDEO EDITOR

Working with Dolby Digital 5.1

in Video Editor
Given that you have the right hardware configuration, Video Editor makes it very
easy to set up, organize, edit and encode Dolby Surround projects.

Surround sound hardware requirements

Although it is possible to mix surround sound with just any sound card installed on
your computer, for professional results and interactive workflow, you will need an
appropriate configuration of your sound card and speakers.

Sound card options:

• Dolby Digital 5.1 compatible sound card
• Three stereo channels sound card
• External Dolby Digital 5.1 USB sound system

Speaker setup option:

• Six speakers (L/R front speakers, L/R rear speakers, center (dialogue) speaker
and one subwoofer)

Refer to your sound card manufacturer's documentation for the proper setup
instructions and speaker connectivity details.

Once your hardware is configured properly, you are ready to mix surround sound.

Setting up surround sound projects

In Video Editor, you can start a new project to use 5.1 surround sound, or you can
enable 5.1 surround sound in your existing project by changing the project
settings.

To create a surround sound project:

1. Select File: New.
2. In the New dialog box, select MPEG files from Edit file format drop-down list.
3. Select a 5.1 template from Excisting project templates menu on the left.
4. To customize Dolby Digital 5.1 project settings, click Create.
 CHAPTER 6: DOLBY DIGITAL 5.1 SURROUND SOUND 147

5. In the Template Options dialog box with the Video Editor tab active, select
Multi-Channel (Dolby Digital) Surround Sound from the Audio channels
list.
Choose a compression codec from the Compression tab, and select Dolby
Digital Audio from the Audio Format list, specify Audio type and Audio bit
rate.
6. Click OK to apply the settings.
7. The Save New Template dialog box then appears. Select Save the current
settings to save your custom settings as a new template.

Check your target device (DVD-ROM, DVD player, etc.) documentation before
confirming compression settings and format properties in the Project Settings
dialog box. While some devices support a broad range of encodings, other
devices have strict audio format requirements for smooth playback.

To enable surround sound in an existing project:

1. Select Project: Project Settings.
2. In the Project Settings dialog box, click Edit.
3. In the Project Options dialog box with Video Editor tab active, select Multi-
Channel Surround Sound from the Audio channels list.
4. Repeat steps 7 through 9 in the previous procedure to specify custom settings
and finalize the change.

Having your project ready for surround sound, you can start working with audio
tracks and mixing your audio.

If you now open the Audio Mixing Panel , you will see 5.1 controls replacing
the standard stereo sound mixing panel. See the next section, ‘Mixing Dolby
Surround’to find out how to use the Audio Mixing Panel to mix 5.1 sound.

Mixing Dolby Surround

One important thing about mixing 5.1 sound is making the output realistic.
Imagine the real world with thousands of sounds taking place at one moment. All
of them are scattered all over the place within the audible range and they meet
together at a precise location - your ears. Dolby Surround is designed exactly the
same way - you will need to decide on exact configuration of the audio channels.
148 VIDEO EDITOR

Video Editor's Audio Mixing Panel has all the controls to position sounds around
the listener, outputting audio through the 5.1 configuration of multiple speakers.

5.1 Audio Mixing Panel

All audio channels in the Audio Mixing Panel have a set of similar controls that you
will find in stereo configuration of this panel, plus a few more specific controls:

• Six-channel UV Meter - Front Left (FL), Front Right (FR), Center (CEN), Low
Frequency Effect (LFE), Rear Left (RL), Rear Right (RR).
• Center volume control - controls the amount of output sound from the center
speaker.
• Low Frequency Effect (LFE) volume control - controls the amount of low-
frequency sound output from the subwoofer.

Low-frequency sound is less directional than sound output from satellite

speakers. Therefore, you can put it anywhere in the room after some
experimenting. Each living space has its own acoustics so there are no fixed
rules.

To begin mixing audio, first populate the audio tracks on the timeline with sound
files. There could be as few as two files for a quick mix or as many as you have in
mind and your hardware will allow for.
 CHAPTER 6: DOLBY DIGITAL 5.1 SURROUND SOUND 149

If you don’t have separate audio clips for each of the six channels required for
Dolby Surround mixing, MediaStudio Pro will generate the channels
automatically. The only requirement for automatic splitting of the single
stereo clip into six channels is that Dolby Surround Sound must be activated
in the project settings.

In the following example, we will create a mix of a hopping sound that jumps
among the three front speakers. This simple effect could be used in many different
situations - echo in the mountains, screams from the crowd, random shots, etc. -
all can be mixed in the same way.

To create a panning sound mix:

1. Insert a sound clip longer than 6 seconds into the Audio1 track. Make sure it
starts off at the beginning of the track.
2. Cut the clip at 2 and 4 seconds.
3. Move the two-to-four seconds part to the Audio2 track. Offset it slightly,
moving forward in time.
4. Repeat the same step with the four-to-six part, placing it on track Audio 3.
5. In the Audio Mixing Panel, click on the yellow dot in the middle of the
leftmost Audio 1 pan window. Drag it to the upper left corner of the window.
6. Repeat the step in the Audio 2 pan window, dragging the dot to upper center.
7. Do the same in Audio 3, putting the dot in the upper right corner.
8. Click the Play button to stream the mix. Notice how the sound pans from left to
right. Try placing audio clips on more than three tracks, experiment with sound
volume and position controls.

To edit the volume of the center channel, adjust the Center volume
slider. Similarly, to edit the volume of the Low Frequency Effect
(LFE) channel, adjust the LFE volume slider next to the sound pan
window.

To edit the volume of the surround mix as a whole, adjust the Master
volume slider.

The more advanced mixes would include far more than just three clips of the same
source.
150 VIDEO EDITOR

To achieve a high degree of realism, you will need to combine sounds originating
from different angles as you shoot your video. The ideal mix is obtained from six
discrete channels of audio recorded simultaneously. Having six separate
microphones for each of the Dolby Surround channels may seem an overkill for a
simple video job, but if you go further than that, consider separate recording an
option.

Creating a surround sound audio file

After you are done mixing, encode your project into 5.1 compatible audio format.
The steps for encoding are the same as when creating any audio file (see “Creating
an audio file” on page 162) except for the quality settings. You can choose to
create a surround sound audio file in WAV or WMA format.
 7

CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO

Once you are done editing your project, render it into a video file format that
is suitable for your audience or purpose. You can transform the rendered video
file into a Movie Screen Saver for your Windows desktop or record it to a
camcorder. You can also export the rendered video file for DVD authoring
before burning it as a DVD, SVCD, or VCD.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Creating a video file

Creating HDV or HD video files
Creating a VCD
Creating an SVCD
Creating a DVD
Creating an audio file
Creating an image sequence
Analyzing a video file's data rate
Recording to a digital video camcorder
Creating an Edit Decision List (EDL) file
Outputting to analog video tape
Exporting to Ulead DVD MovieFactory and Ulead DVD DiskRecorder
152 VIDEO EDITOR

Creating a video file

When you're finished editing and the previews look good, it is time to do a final
render of your project. Choose a video format that is suitable for where the
rendered video file will be played or shared.

If you only want to render a portion of your project, click and drag your
mouse over the Preview range bar to create a preview range.

To create a video file:

1. Click File: Create - Video File to open the Create Video File dialog box.
2. Type a name for the file in the File name entry box.
3. Select the drive and folder where you want to save the video and specify the file
type you want to create, such as AVI, MPG, MP4, 3GP, or WMV.
4. Click Template, then choose a format template from the menu.
For instance, if you selected MPG as the file type in step 3, you can choose a
template that will encode the video file as DVD with Dolby Digital sound, HDV
transport stream, or as a regular DVD or VCD.
5. If there are no available templates or you cannot find a template in step 4 that
suits your needs, click the Options button to open the Video Save Options
dialog box to specify your own attributes for encoding the video file. (This can
be a complicated process. See “Determining your video save options” on
page 156 to learn more about these options.)
After you are done changing the attributes, click OK to close the Video Save
Options dialog box and return to the Create Video File dialog box.
6. Select Save to Production Library if you want to save the video file to the
Production Library's Media Library.
7. Click Save.

• Render your project with exactly the same attributes as your captured video.
The project should render very quickly and the quality will be the best you
can get. The most important attributes you should check are codec, frame
rate, and frame size. You can check these settings by right-clicking on a
selected video clip in your project and selecting Properties from the pop-up
menu.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 153

• Render as few times as possible, preferably only once. For example, don't
render a Ulead VideoStudio or COOL 3D project and then import the AVI into
Video Editor and render it again. Instead, directly import the project file onto
the Video Editor Timeline.

Creating MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 files

MPEG is still an ideal format to use for sharing or for playback on the computer.

To create MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 files:

1. Click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select MPEG Files (*.mpg) from the Save as type list.
3. Click the Options button.
4. Click the Compression tab.

5. Select the type of MPEG file, MPEG-1 or MPEG-2, you want to create.

Choose NTSC or PAL DVD, SVCD, or VCD as the Media type if you want to
create an MPEG file that is ready for burning onto disc.

6. Click OK.
7. Enter a File name for your MPEG movie and click OK.

Creating HDV or HD video files

Video Editor allows you to create a high definition video file that you can view on
your computer using a software player that supports playback of HDV or HD
formatted videos.

To create an HDV or HD-encoded MPEG-2 file:

1. Select File: Create - Video File.
2. In Save as type, select MPEG in the list.

You can also choose to export the video in other formats such as DVD-
compliant MPEG-2 or DV.

3. Click Template and select an HDV or HD template from the pop-up menu,
depending on how your video was encoded (HDV, HD or SD).
154 VIDEO EDITOR

If you want to record the video file back to the HDV or HD camcorder,
select a transport stream template. The file name extension for this type of
video file is M2T (MPEG-2 Transport Stream).

4. Enter a File name and click Save.

Creating WMV HD files

WMV HD is a great way to deliver high-definition video at a compressed format
that provides much higher quality than standard definition DVD. WMV-HD is
Microsoft's Windows Media Video 9 Series optimized for high-definition playback
with 5.1 to 7.1 surround sound WMA. (Stereo sound is also supported).

To create WMV-HD files:

1. Select File: Create - Video File.
2. In the Create Video File dialog box, select Windows Media Video from the
Save as type list.
3. Click Template, then select a WMV HD profile (such as Ulead - WMV HD 720
24p) to use the default provided template settings for creating the WMV HD file.
If you want to specify custom settings, click Options: Profile - Customize.
Use the New, Edit, or Copy button to create, modify, or duplicate profiles.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 155

For details on modifying settings in a profile, see “Editing and customizing a

video profile” on page 221.
4. Enter a file name then click Save to create the WMV HD file.

Creating WMV/ QuickTime streaming file

Streaming video is a good way to display video on the Internet. This allows your
video to begin playing while still downloading. MediaStudio Pro supports
RealNetworkís RealVideo (*.RM), Microsoft's Windows Media Video format (*.WMV,
or *.ASF), and Apple QuickTime (*.QT or *.MOV). These are the formats popularly
used on the Internet.

To create a QuickTime streaming file:

1. Open your project and click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select QuickTime Movie Files (*.mov, *.qt) from the Save as type list.
3. Click the Options button.
4. Click the Compression tab.
5. Select Prepare for Internet streaming. This makes the file available for
Internet viewing.
6. Select the streaming method to be used from the drop down list. This
determines how the video file will be delivered over the Internet.
• Fast Start Uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and FTP (File Transfer
Protocol) as transmission protocols for streaming the video file over the
Internet. While waiting for the downloading to be finished, the browser
utilizes QuickTime Plug-in to play the completed portions of the video file.
• Fast Start - Compressed Head Compresses the data for streaming the
video file over the Internet through HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and
FTP (File Transfer Protocol).
• Hinted Streaming Uses RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) or RTSP (Real-
Time Streaming Protocol) as transmission protocols for streaming the video
file over the Internet. Hinted Streaming creates hint tracks for every
streamable media file types. It does not save the downloaded files locally and
is used for viewing only.
7. Click OK.
8. Enter a File name for your QuickTime movie and click Save.
156 VIDEO EDITOR

To create a WMV streaming file:

1. Open your project and click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select Windows Media Video (*.wmv, *.asf) from the Save as type list.
3. Click the Options button.
4. Click the Profile tab. This displays the current template used for compressing
media files so they can be streamed over the Internet.
5. Click Customize to select the desired template for optimizing media files for
simultaneous download and playback on the Web.
When choosing a template, consider the type of users that will be playing your
media files over the Internet. For instance, use the Dial-up modems - ISDN
option for Multiple Bit Rate Video (default) template to cover the range of home
PC users that access the Internet through modem or single-channel ISDN
connections. For users with higher speed connections such as corporate LANs,
dual-channel ISDN or DSL, choose the network bandwidth that best satisfies
your target audience.
6. Click Close to return to the Video Save Options dialog box.
7. Click OK.
8. Enter a File name for your Windows Media Video movie and click Save.

Determining your video save options

The properties that you specify when saving a video file determine your output
quality. MediaStudio Pro offers different settings that you can apply to achieve a
high-quality video. The set of available options depends on the output file format
that you want, since each file format may contain attributes that are different or
not present in another.

There are, however, options that are applicable in all file formats. The following
section will discuss these general options.

Video Save Options: Video Editor tab

• Entire project creates a video file of the entire project while Preview range
creates a video file of the preview area only. (This option is disabled if your video
project has no preview area.)

• Perform non-square pixel rendering performs non-square pixel rendering when

previewing your video. Non-square pixel support helps avoid distortion and keeps the
real resolution of DV and MPEG2 content. Generally, the square pixel is suited for the
aspect ratio of computer monitors while the non-square pixel is best used for viewing
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 157

on a TV screen. Remember to take into account which medium will be your primary
mode of display.

• Play after creating plays the resulting video file after its creation. This can serve as
a signal that the rendering has finished.

• Perform SmartRender speeds up the creation process by reusing previously saved

video, re-rendering only the areas modified since you last created the video. (You
must use the same file name and destination.) Video Editor detects these differences
by monitoring the changes made to the video project and matching those with the
existing video file.

• Perform auto de-interlace merges interlaced video sub-frames into full-frame

video. Select this option if you have interlaced clips in the Timeline and you want to
render a frame-based progressive scan video file.

• Key frame control allows you to control the placement of key frames for
compression schemes that support interframe compression (such as Cinepak). This
can help the compression algorithm emphasize important segments.

• Cropping displays a dialog box where you can modify the frame dimensions of the
video.

Cropping is a useful method for controlling the frame size of a video without having
to resize the actual frames. This is important as resizing frames resamples the
original video, resulting in distortion and loss of quality. The downside though is that
you need to remove data which may or may not be important. Cropping is also good
for removing unwanted noise that may occur around the edges of a video due to bad
capturing or copying.

Cropping dialog box:

• Cropping specifies the area of the video that you want to crop (remove) from the
resulting video file. You can enter values in the spin boxes provided in the
Cropping group box or drag on the control points on the preview image.

• Keep original size resamples the cropped video so that it maintains the specified
frame size (this does produce degradation however, depending on the amount of
resampling involved). After resizing the control box you can move its position by
dragging it. (Use the slider beneath the window to preview how your changes
affect the video.)

Video Save Options: General tab

• Data track specifies whether to create a video file of the video track only, or both
the video and the accompanying audio track. (To save the audio track only click the
File: Create - Audio File command.)

• Frame rate specifies the frame rate to use for the resulting video file. For example,
NTSC video is typically 29.97fps. See your capture board's manual for specific frame
rate advice.
158 VIDEO EDITOR

• Frame type select between saving your work as field-based or frame-based video
files. Field-based video stores video data as two distinct fields of information for each
frame. If your video is only for computer playback, you should save your work as
frame-based.

• Frame size determines the size of each video frame. You can choose from a range of
predefined sizes or define your own.

• Display aspect ratio maintains the vertical and horizontal proportions of your
video. When cleared, you can independently resize the video to create non-standard
effects such as widescreen TV.

• The frame rate and frame size you choose should match the frame rate and
size of your captured video clips if you intend to output your video back to
tape. You can find this information by right-clicking a selected video clip on
the Timeline and selecting Properties from the pop-up menu.

• When you select a compression scheme, the Key frame for every spin box
changes to indicate the default number of key frames the scheme uses.

• Generally speaking, it is best to try out a variety of compression schemes

and options on a test version of the same file, then compare the resulting file
sizes and playback quality.

• If you select new attributes in the Audio Format dialog box and wish to save
them for later use, click the Save As button. The Save As dialog box opens
allowing you to assign a name to the attributes. Clicking OK saves the
attributes and the specified name appearing in the Name list.

AVI and MPEG formats are most commonly used in saving video files. For AVI files,
an AVI tab is available in the Video Save Options dialog box. Compression type,
data type, and audio formats can be set in this tab. If you have a target playback
device, the AVI tab also offers Advanced options for customizing video file
properties for specified processing speed and PC capabilities.

The Compression tab, which is available for the MPEG format, contains options
for media type, audio settings, and data rate. In this tab, you are given the option
of choosing the variable bit rate (VBR) encoding method. This method produces
better picture quality with a smaller file size.

There are eight MPEG subsets under Media type in the Compression tab. Users
can save their videos as DVD/VCD/SVCD-ready MPEG files (NTSC or PAL) by
simply selecting the desired media type from the drop-down menu.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 159

You can save the settings that you have provided for your video as a template.
Instead of going over the steps again, in just a few mouse clicks, you can come up
with the preferred settings by applying a template.

To save the settings as template:

1. In the Create Video File dialog box, click Template.
2. Select Add Template. Enter a preferred name for the template. Settings
provided for the template are displayed in Save options.

Performing a batch video creation

Video Editor allows you to create a number of video files from different projects
automatically. This is ideal if you want to render your videos with your machine
unattended, such as overnight.

To perform a batch video file creation:

1. Click File: Create - Multiple Files to open the Create Multiple Files dialog
box.
2. Click the Add button. In the Open dialog box select the project file (*.DVP or
*VSP) you want to create a video file from. Once selected, click Open. The
standard Create Video File (or Create Audio File) dialog box opens.
3. In the Create Video File dialog box enter a Name and set up any other
Options. Click Save when finished. The dialog box closes and you return to the
Create Multiple Files dialog box. Select the next project file you want to
render and repeat.
4. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the video files are created in the order they
appear in the Project list box.

Clear the Display data rate warning message option in the General tab of
the Preferences dialog box if you do not want the creation process halted
when the actual data rate exceeds the defined data rate.
160 VIDEO EDITOR

Creating a VCD
VCD (Video CD) is a video format that can be recorded onto CD using a CD writer.
With a 650MB CD, a disc can hold up to 74 minutes of video; whereas a 700MB CD
can be recorded with up to 80 minutes of video.

The video quality of VCD is comparable to that of VHS. VCDs can be played in
computers as well as in home DVD players that support Video CD playback.

Before you can burn a VCD, you must first render your project as a VCD-ready
MPEG-1 file. This type of MPEG-1 file follows "WhiteBook" VCD standard.

To create an VCD-ready MPEG-1 file:

1. Open your project and click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select MPEG files (*.mpg) from the Save as type list.
3. Click the Options button.
4. Click the Compression tab.
5. From the Media type list, select NTSC VCD (or PAL VCD, depending on your
TV standard).
6. Click OK. Enter a name and click Save to render your movie.

After rendering a VCD-ready MPEG-1 file, import this file into Ulead DVD
MovieFactory and burn a VCD. You can also use Ulead DVD
DiskRecorder(DVD-VR) from the File: Export menu to burn a disc. For details
on how to use these bundled software, see “More Programs” on page 268.

Creating an SVCD
SVCD (Super Video CD) is an enhancement to VCD. It can hold up to 35-60
minutes of high quality full-motion video in MPEG-2 format with up to 2 stereo
audio tracks. It can contain up to four independent subtitling channels for different
languages and can be played on most standalone DVD Players and computers with
CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive provided that it has the right decoder. Much like DVDs,
SVCDs also supports HTML style hyperlinks, still images, playlists or slideshows,
and multi-level hierarchical menus and chapters.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 161

Comparatively, SVCD has much better video and audio quality than VCD.

To create an SVCD-ready MPEG-2 file:

1. Open your project and click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select MPEG files (*.mpg) from the Save as type list.
3. Click the Options button.
4. Click the Compression tab.
5. From the Media type list, select NTSC SVCD (or PAL SVCD, depending on
your TV standard).
6. Click OK. Enter a name and click Save to render your movie.

After rendering an SVCD-ready MPEG-2 file, select File: Export - DVD Authoring
and import this file into Ulead DVD MovieFactory and burn an SVCD. You can
also use Ulead DVD DiskRecorder(DVD-VR) from the File: Export menu to
burn a disc. For details on how to use these bundled software, see “More
Programs” on page 268.

Creating a DVD
DVD stands for "digital video disc" or "digital versatile disc" and is considered as
the next generation of optical disc storage technology. What makes it exciting is
that it is a bigger and faster CD which can hold cinema-like video, high quality
audio (which is better than an ordinary CD audio), and computer data that uses
MPEG-2 codec.

To create a DVD-ready MPEG-2 file:

1. Open your project and click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select MPEG files (*.mpg) from the Save as type list.
3. Click the Options button.
4. Click the Compression tab.
5. From the Media type list, select NTSC DVD (or PAL DVD, depending on your
TV standard).
6. Click OK. Enter a name and click Save to render your movie.
162 VIDEO EDITOR

After rendering a DVD-ready MPEG-2 file, select File: Export - DVD Authoring
and import this file into Ulead DVD MovieFactory to do DVD Authoring, if
desired, and burn a DVD. If you want to directly burn a DVD, you can also select
File: Export - Ulead DVD DiskRecorder(DVD-VR). For details on how to use
these bundled software, see “More Programs” on page 268.

Creating an audio file

You can create audio files from a clip or group of clips in the audio tracks using the
File: Create - Audio File command. These files can then be opened in Audio
Editor for more precise editing, or you can use them in another project.

To create an audio file:

1. Click File: Create - Audio File to open the Create Audio File dialog box.
2. Select the drive and folder where you want to save the file and select the file
type you want to create from the Save as type list.
3. Enter a File name.
4. Click the Options button to view or edit the specific details of the file in the
Audio Save Options dialog box. The Compression tab contains the options
you need to specify to determine the quality (and thus the size) of the audio
file. Click OK to accept the current audio attributes.
5. Click Save.

You can also append a subject line and a short description to your file as well as
save the file to the Production Library. Clicking the Select button also allows you
to assign a thumbnail image from any of the clips in the project for use as a visual
representation of the file in any preview enabled dialog box or browser.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 163

Creating an image sequence

There may be times when you want to extract a series of frames from your clip for
editing in a more powerful image editing application, like Photoshop or
PhotoImpact. You can do this by creating a Ulead Image Sequence (*.UIS) file
of the video project or preview region. When you create a Ulead Image Sequence,
Video Editor sequentially numbers each frame and saves it as a standard image
file. You can convert these images back to a video file using the File: Convert -
Video File command and selecting the *.UIS file type.

To create a Ulead image sequence:

1. Click File: Create - Video File.
2. Select Ulead Image Sequence Files (*.UIS) and the drive and folder where
you want to save the frames of the video.
3. Enter a File name.
4. Click the Options button to view or edit the properties for each of the image
sequence files.

When creating a Ulead image sequence, all options in the Video Save
Options dialog box are ignored except for those in the Format tab.

5. Click the Format tab and select the file format and data type of the images in
the sequence. If the file type you select allows customization, the Image Save
Options button is enabled.
6. Click OK. The Options dialog box closes returning you to the Create Video
File dialog box.
7. Click Save.

Animation programs frequently have the option of outputting animations as an

image series. These can, of course, be imported into MediaStudio Pro.
164 VIDEO EDITOR

Analyzing a video file's data rate

In Video Editor, you can analyze a video file and view a graphical representation of
the data flow for the entire sequence. This provides detailed information about the
file and its data rate. This information can be used to target high data rate areas
for more compression using key frames.

To perform a data rate analysis:

1. Click File: Data Rate Analysis to open the Data Rate Analysis dialog box.
2. Browse for and select the video file that you want to analyze and then click
Analysis.

Data Rate Analysis dialog box

The Data Rate Analysis window details the various attributes of the file and
shows a graph indicating the size of each frame in the video. This graph contains a
number of blue frames which indicate key frames in the video sequence (key
frame diamonds are also visible beneath the Preview window). For some video
compression schemes (such as Cinepak), you can control these key frames and
arrange their order so that you get the maximum benefit out of compression.

By looking at the analysis graph, you can pinpoint peaks in the graph which would
benefit most from being key frames.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 165

To edit the key frames on the data rate analysis graph:

1. Select the frame you want to make or remove using the Key frame Controller
beneath the Preview window.
2. To make a key frame, click the Add Key frame button. A key frame is placed
on the Key frame track and the frame in the data rate graph changes to blue. To
remove a key frame, click the Remove Key frame button. The respective key
frame disappears from the Key frame track and the frame changes to gray. To
return a clip to its original settings click Restore.

Removing a key frame doesn’t remove the frame itself, it only removes the
reference to that frame as a key frame.

3. Click Save As to save the new key frame information to a Key file (*.KEY). To
apply the key file, you need to re-render the video file again, making sure you
specify the key file in the Key frame control group box in the Video Editor
tab of the Video Save Options dialog box.

Not all compression schemes will follow the key file, and those that do, such
as Cinepak, may still insert key frames wherever they determine there is a
need. This is out of the control of Video Editor and in the hands of the
compression scheme itself. Therefore, you may sometimes find that removing
key frames does not change your video appreciably in your next analysis.

Recording to a digital video camcorder

To record your finished project to a DV or HDV/HD camcorder, you must first
render it as a DV AVI or HDV/HD-encoded MPEG-2 file. Select File: Export - DVD
Recording to record your file to a camcorder.

To record a movie to your DV or HDV/HD camcorder:

1. Turn on your camcorder and set it to Play mode (or VTR mode). See your
camcorder's manual for specific instructions.
2. Click File: Select Device Control. From the Current device list, select MS
1394 Device Control if you have a DV camcorder or select HDV 1394 Device
Control if you have an HDV/HD camcorder.
3. Click File: Export - DV Recording (or TI DV Record, or PAPI DV Record
depending on your capture board).
166 VIDEO EDITOR

4. Select the DV AVI or MPEG-2 file that you want to send to your camcorder. Click
the Open button.
5. In the DV Recording - Preview Window, preview your file and click Next.
6. In the DV Recording - Record Window, click the DV Recording button to
begin recording the movie to your camcorder.

DV Recording button

Video Editor should have automatic control ("device control") of your

camcorder and should record to your tape. If the camcorder does not
automatically begin recording, simply start the camera recording manually
before you click DV recording in step 6.

External preview
MediaStudio Pro supports third party plug-ins where you can preview transition
effects and video filters using the Preview Window, or directly to the DV
camcorder. If your display card supports two output devices aside from DV
camcorder, use it to preview the filter/effect by selecting Dual Head Device on
the External playback device option of the dialog box.

To preview using an external playback device:

1. In the Production Library, select Transition Effect, Moving Path, or Video
Filter from the drop down list.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 167

2. Double-click on the thumbnail to open the corresponding dialog box.

3. Click the Play in Preview Window or External Monitor button .

4. Click the Preview Playback Options button below the Preview window.
5. In the Preview Playback Options dialog box, choose an external playback device
where you want to preview your video file from the drop-down list.
6. Click Options to adjust the settings of the selected preview device.
7. Click OK.

Creating an Edit Decision List (EDL) file

If you are producing work that is intended for broadcast or requires further post-
production (online editing) work, then Video Editor allows you to create a generic
Edit Decision List (EDL) file. An EDL is a text file that records the positions of
your clips in the Timeline as well as the different effects and transitions used.
When preparing an EDL, it is important that you contact your post-production
house to determine the format they use as well as which effects are supported ñ
particularly because not all post-production companies support the wide array of
effects available in Video Editor.

You must post the timecode (see the next page) onto each of your clips in a
video project before creating an EDL. To do this, you first need to have
captured the video from a controllable source with timecode capabilities.

To create an EDL file:

1. Click File: Create - EDL File to open the Create EDL File dialog box.
2. Select the drive and folder where you want to save the EDL.
3. Enter a File name.
4. Enter in a title for the EDL file in the Title entry box (maximum 64 characters).
5. Specify the starting time in the Record in box. This tells the production house
where in the video sequence to start recording.
168 VIDEO EDITOR

Posting timecode
If you plan to create an EDL, you need to make sure that you have posted a
timecode onto each of the clips in your video project. This is because the post-
production house needs to know where your original source clips are located on
tape. If a clip does not have the correct timecode, the post-production house will
use 00:00:00:00 as the starting point for playing a clip during recording.

To accurately post timecode, you need to have recorded the timecode at the
time of capture using a controllable device.

To post timecode:
1. Click Clip: Post Timecode to open the Post Timecode dialog box.
2. Type the name of your source video in the Reel name entry box, for example,
"Wedding #1."
3. Specify the appropriate time to start recording from the source in the
Timecode spin box.
The timecode should have been recorded when you captured the video from
Video Capture using a controllable device. You can view this timecode by
clicking View: View Capture Log in Video Capture and then loading in the
original batch list file (BCT).
4. Click OK.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 169

Outputting to analog video tape

To output to an analog video tape, you should ensure that all the video sequences
you used were created from field-based video and that you saved the video file as
field-based. Using non-field-based video results in a slight flicker in the final
analog video. Your video should also be equivalent to the resolution of analog
video, such as 640x480, 30fps (field-based), and 24-bit color (for NTSC devices).
You must create your video using EXACTLY the same settings as your captured
video. Anything less results in resampling which introduces degradation. Consult
your capture board's manual for detailed instructions on the attributes of the
captured video. You can also right-click on a selected video clip on the Timeline
and select Properties from the pop-up menu to see this information.

If you have already created an avi file with your project, it is easy to print the
finished movie to tape.

To output a video to tape, you need a video capture board which supports
this, or a similar device with a VGA to TV converter. It is also advisable to
have a controllable device that allows you to control the recording from Video
Editor.

To output an avi file to video tape:

1. Click File: Print To Tape: Video File to open the Select Video File dialog box.
2. Locate and select the file you want to output and then click the Options button.
The Print To Tape Options dialog box opens.
3. Set the time Delay. Start determines the length of the delay before the video is
played while End sets the length for after the video has played. Selecting
Manual allows you to control playback with your keyboard or mouse.

Setting a delay gives you time to activate your recording device and get it
up to speed before the video plays on your screen.

4. Select Device control if you want MediaStudio Pro to control your video
camera while recording your project.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and then Open to begin playing back the
sequence.

Once you click Open, your entire screen blacks out and after the specified duration
the video begins to play back. (Hit a key on the keyboard or click your mouse to
170 VIDEO EDITOR

start playing if you chose the Manually with keyboard or mouse option.) You
may also want to print your movie directly from the Timeline to video tape without
creating a file.

To output directly from the Timeline to video tape:

1. Click File: Print To Tape: Timeline to open the Select Timeline dialog box.
2. Choose whether to output the Entire project or just a selected Preview
range.
3. Select Options to open the Print To Tape Options dialog box and follow steps 3
and 4 of the outputting an avi file procedures.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and then OK again to begin playing back the
sequence.
The movie then plays back while rendering, the same as it would when rendering
for a preview. After the rendering is finished, the video is played for recording, the
same as when copying an AVI file to video tape.

Before the video starts playing, be sure to start your recording device. Once
finished, use Video Capture to play back the video directly from the video
capture source to see the results.
To cancel or end the playback, press the [ESC] key.

It is not necessary to use MediaStudio Pro to send your video back to tape. There
are many dozens of different kinds of capture boards and each comes with its own
software for capturing and recording to tape. Some people prefer to edit their
video in MediaStudio Pro and then output to tape using the capture board's
proprietary software.

Under a FAT 16 file system (Win95), there is a 2GB file size limitation. Under FAT
32 (Win95 OSR2, Win98 and Windows XP), there is a 4GB file size limitation. If you
use NTFS (WinNT, Win2000 and Windows XP), theoretically, there is no limit to file
size. One way around the file limitation problem is to create files smaller than 2GB
and load them into MediaStudio Pro's Timeline sequentially. You can then use
Timeline playback to play the files back seamlessly to tape.
 CHAPTER 7: CREATING AND EXPORTING FINAL VIDEO 171

Exporting to Ulead DVD MovieFactory and

Ulead DVD DiskRecorder
In Video Editor, you can export your rendered video files to Ulead DVD
MovieFactory to create DVDs, VCDs and SVCDs. With DVD MovieFactory's DVD
authoring capabilities, you can create selection menus like the ones you see on
Hollywood DVDs.

You can also export your video files to Ulead DVD DiskRecorder to output them
to a device that supports DVD-RAM (using DVD-VR format) or DVD-R.

To export your videos to DVD MovieFactory:

1. Select File: Export - DVD Authoring to export a rendered video file.
2. The Select Video File dialog box will appear. Select the file you want to open
then click OK.
3. The Ulead DVD MovieFactory program opens.

To export your videos to DVD DiskRecorder:

1. Select File: Export - Ulead DVD DiskRecorder(DVD-VR).
2. In the Select Video File dialog box, select the file you want to open then click
OK.
3. The Ulead DVD DiskRecorder program opens.

To learn more about using Ulead DVD MovieFactory and Ulead DVD DiskRecorder,
see “More Programs” on page 268 for a comprehensive discussion of the two
programs.
172 VIDEO EDITOR
 8

MANAGING VIDEO PROJECTS

The scope of a video project can become quite large, incorporating several
media files and numerous effects. Things may also get very complicated,
especially if a project needs to be shared for collaboration among video
editors. To easily manage projects and optimize the workflow, Video Editor
offers a host of smart tools and advanced features.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Smart Package
Smart Relink
Converting files
Using the Quick Command Panel
174 VIDEO EDITOR

Smart Package
Packaging a video project is useful if you want to back up your work or transfer
your files for sharing or for editing in a laptop or another computer. To package,
select Project: Smart Package.

1. How to package - When you select

one of the methods under this group
box, the options for packaging are
already pre-selected for you. There are
three packaging methods to choose
from:
• Archival Package will back up all
the media source files used in the
main project timeline and their
proxy files. Clip files that were
trimmed using the Smart Trim
tool will also be included.
• Mobile package will perform the
same backup process as Archival
package but will exclude smart-
trimmed clip files.
• Smart-trimmed package will
back up all the media source files
used in the main project timeline
and smart-trimmed clip files.
2. Options - In this group box, you can choose additional items or specify
additional conditions for packaging:
• If you have no proxy files in your project, you can generate them
automatically during the package process by selecting Auto create all
proxy files.
• If you chose to do a Smart-trimmed package, select Include handles to
append additional frames before and after clips for safe trimming. Specify
the number of frames to append.
3. Destination folder - Specify the target folder where to package the files.

To transfer a video project file and its source files to another PC, use the
same directory structure as the original to ensure the clips are correctly
linked.
 CHAPTER 8: MANAGING VIDEO PROJECTS 175

4. Method - Choose whether to copy or move files while packaging. Copy will
back up files and still leave them in their original location, whereas Move will
transfer the files and delete them from their original location after the
packaging process is complete.

Smart Relink
Since a DVP file contains links to potentially hundreds of files on your computer, it
is not uncommon for these files to occasionally get lost. This can happen when you
have moved them or maybe edited the files in another program. From the Project
menu, select Smart - Smart Relink to locate these files. If you have moved an
entire group of files to a new folder or hard drive, Smart Relink will find all of the
files after you relink just one, provided the relative directory structure has
remained the same.

Converting files
There are many cases where you might want to convert video files to a different
format. You can use Video Editor as a quick conversion tool without even opening a
video file into a specific project.

To convert a video file to another format:

1. Click File: Convert: Video File.

You can convert AVI, MOV, MPG and animation files such as FLI, FLC and
FLX as well as Ulead’s own UCG, UIS, and UVP files.

2. Select the file to convert and click Open. The dialog box changes to the Select
Destination Video File dialog box.
3. Enter a file name, select the file type, and choose a destination for the
converted file.
4. Click the Options button to set the attributes for the converted file.
5. Click Save.
176 VIDEO EDITOR

Smart Check & Convert

Smart Check & Convert is related to the above procedure but is specifically
designed to bring video files in line with a project's settings. Since your project's
settings determine the final movie's format, any clips you have inserted that are
different from this final format will need to be re-rendered. This time consuming
process will be repeated every time you render your movie. You can save time by
converting the source clips early in the project.

To convert a project:
1. Click Project: Smart - Smart Check & Convert. Files that may need to be
converted are listed in the Non-optimized file list.
2. Select a file to see which of its properties are inconsistent with the project's
settings.
3. Select the files you want to convert. Use the [SHIFT] and [CTRL] keys to
select multiple files. Click Convert.

Select Save in the same folder to automatically overwrite the old files with
the newly converted ones.

The process of converting these files could take some time, but it is a one-time
render and will save you time in the long run.

Batch Convert
Batch Convert allows you to simultaneously convert a large number of files to
another format.

To do Batch Convert:
1. Select File: Convert - Batch Convert.
2. Choose the files you want to convert then click Add.
3. Select an output folder in Save in Folder.
4. Click Convert. A window showing the converting progress will appear. Wait until
it closes.
 CHAPTER 8: MANAGING VIDEO PROJECTS 177

5. The result is shown in the Task Report dialog box. Click OK to finish.

You can save the files you want to convert directly inside the Production
Library. To save, select Options in the Batch Convert dialog box then select
Save to Library in the Library tab.

Using the Quick Command Panel

Open the Quick Command Panel by clicking Window:
Quick Command Panel (You can also open it by
clicking on the Quick Command Panel icon on the
toolbar.) The Quick Command Panel’s advantage
over the Menu bar is that you can select and put
frequently used commands on the panel for more
convenient access, as well as move and resize the
panel so that it is always close at hand.

To determine how many commands appear in the

Quick Command Panel, right-click anywhere in the Quick Command Panel
Quick Command Panel and select the Layout
Options command. In the dialog box that opens, you
can specify the number of commands to appear in custom and cache areas. The
custom area displays commands you specifically insert into the panel while the
cache area automatically tracks the last commands you have used. Selecting the
Save when program closes option saves your changes whenever you quit Video
Editor. Leave this clear if you want to save the current configuration.

Custom commands appear at the top of the Quick Command Panel: Cache
commands at the bottom.

To add commands to the Quick Command Panel:

1. Right-click anywhere in the Quick Command Panel.
2. Click Modify.
3. Select an item from the Menu list and then select a specific command from the
left hand side. All of the commands associated with that menu appear in the list
box below it.
178 VIDEO EDITOR

4. Click Add to place the command on the Quick Command Panel.

5. Click OK to finish.

You can give a menu command an alias by selecting it and then typing in a
new name in the Alias entry box. For example, ‘Video Editor File Preferences’
can be written as ‘VE Pref’. This is useful if you resize the Quick Command
Panel and find that menu command names are hidden.
 9

INTEGRATION WITH ULEAD PRODUCTS

Creative video projects require different kinds of media to be used in them.

Aside from the popular media file formats, proprietary video projects, 3D
graphics and layered media from other Ulead software packages can be easily
imported into MediaStudio Pro Video Editor. The output media from Video
Editor can also be easily exported to other Ulead software such as
VideoStudio, PhotoImpact and COOL 3D Production Studio.

This chapter includes the following sections:

VideoStudio project files

PhotoImpact UFO files
Importing masks from PhotoImpact
COOL 3D Production Studio files
180 VIDEO EDITOR

VideoStudio project files

If you used Ulead VideoStudio before
and would like to upgrade to
MediaStudio Pro, go right ahead - simply
open the projects in MediaStudio Pro.
Having direct interoperability allows you
to switch back and forth between the
programs until you are completely
confident working in MediaStudio Pro.
You will find that MediaStudio Pro and
VideoStudio share many workflow
elements and dialog box layouts.

PhotoImpact UFO files

PhotoImpact is great at two-dimensional graphics
creation. There are endless possibilities of using it
in conjunction with Media Studio Pro. You can use
PhotoImpact to create slideshows, backgrounds
for movie opening titles, retouch still photographs
to be animated in Media Studio Pro or create
custom graphic elements like occlusion and matte
masks.

PhotoImpact UFO files are treated as any other

image files in MSP. To import a PhotoImpact file
or a series of images, right-click on any video
track in Timeline then select Image file from the
drop down menu.

Importing masks from PhotoImpact

Masking is a powerful method to control your clips transparency. A mask, or a
matte, as it is also called, is simply a black and white image that works like the
 CHAPTER 9: INTEGRATION WITH ULEAD PRODUCTS 181

alpha channel described above. But unlike alpha channels being only a channel in
an image, mattes are complete images you can use in your projects to define
which areas of your video become transparent, which remain opaque. And again,
you can use a single image as a motionless mask for the whole duration of your
video clip, or you can use an animated sequence of masks for the same length.

First, create masks in PhotoImpact, then import them into the Timeline placing on
top of a video track. Mattes are described in detail in the section “Working with
mattes” on page 114.

COOL 3D Production Studio files

One of the most exciting features in MediaStudio
Pro is working with 3D computer generated
graphics. Having solid support for COOL 3D
Production Studio is simply cool - your imagination
is the limit.

Talking about 3D is beyond the scope of this book,

but you can create great-looking 3D text and logo
elements for use in your video productions.

There are three ways to export a MediaStudio Pro - compatible file format from
Cool 3D:

• C3D file: MSP can directly import COOL 3D Production Studio project files
(.c3d).
• COOL 3D Production Studio can export a 32-bit .avi video file with alpha
channel; this method is perfect for compositing work. Alpha channel in the file
will make overlaying easy.
• The third option is to export it as a sequence of images.
An important thing is to use the right settings when outputting sequences from
COOL 3D. Make sure to output frame-based image sequences from COOL 3D. Also,
keep in mind the target format and frame rate of the video project 3D images will
be used in. It is always possible to resize the 3D clips later in Media Studio Pro, but
it will take needless effort to do that.

Refer to COOL 3D Production Studio documentation for instructions on exporting

image sequences and creating video files with animated 3D objects.
182 VIDEO EDITOR

In many cases, 3D animation sequences can be overlaid over a video footage to

create a composite. First, you will need to import the sequence into MediaStudio
Pro, then overlay it over a video clip.

To import COOL 3D Production Studio image sequence:

1. In Video Editor click Insert - Image File - browse to your COOL 3D
Production Studio output folder.
2. [Shift] - Click on a first and the last files in the sequence to select all of them.
(Alternatively, click any image in the folder, then [Ctrl + A] to select).
3. Click [Open] or press [Enter] on your keyboard.
4. Move the insert-type cursor to a video track above the video clip to be overlaid
in the timeline pane and click the left mouse button once.

To overlay video with the COOL 3D Production Studio image sequence:

1. Click on the video track button to select the image sequence clip.
2. Go to Clip - Overlay Options; set Type to Alpha Channel and Mask to
Overlay Clip. Adjust Soft Edge and Transparency sliders to desired values.
3. Click OK or press [Enter].

• Edge fringing or so-called aliasing of the images may spoil your composite.
To avoid jagged-looking edges watch out for the alpha channel that comes
with the imported 3D files. Be sure to output images with Straight Alpha
from these programs.

• If you didn’t work with alpha channels before, here’s a brief introduction. All
digital images could be separated into several channels. Most of professional
graphics software like Ulead Photoimpact have that kind of functionality. The
usual channels of an image are RGB - Red, Green and Blue. As you know,
these are the fundamental components of the white color.

• Alpha is the fourth channel, but unlike the RGB colors, it doesn’t serve the
purpose of defining a color of an image. It is used solely for telling your
computer everything about the image transparency.

• Alpha channel uses black to define full transparency and white to define
complete opaqueness. Shades of gray are semi-transparent places on the
image.

• To learn more about alpha channels, see “Understanding Alpha Channels” on

page 112.
 10

SHORTCUTS

Video Editor has many shortcuts that allow you to access commands and open
dialog boxes without having to go through the menus.

In this chapter, shortcuts are grouped as follows:

File menu
Edit menu
View menu
Search menu
Clip menu
Help menu
Using the Shift key
Using the Ctrl key
Double-clicking
Preview Window and Source Window
Timeline Toolbar
Timeline
Source Window
Production Library
Effects Manager
Miscellaneous
184 VIDEO EDITOR

File menu

Ctrl + N Starts a new video project.

Ctrl + O Displays the Open dialog box.

Ctrl + W Closes the current project file without exiting Video Editor.

Ctrl + S Saves an existing video file.

Alt + Enter Displays the Project Settings dialog box.

F6 Displays the Preferences dialog box.

Ctrl + Q Exits Video Editor.

Edit menu

Ctrl + Z Undoes the last command.

Ctrl + Y Reapplies the last undone command.

Ctrl + X Cuts the selection area onto the clipboard.

Ctrl + C Copies the selection area onto the clipboard.

Ctrl + V Pastes the clipboard contents.

Del Deletes the selected area

Ctrl + L Selects all clips in the Timeline.

Ctrl + B Deselects any selection area.

F7 Invokes the selected clip's associated program.

View menu

+ Zooms in.

- Zooms out.

F9 Toggles between the current and previous view.

 CHAPTER 10: SHORTCUTS 185

Search menu

Ctrl + G Displays the Go To dialog box.

Ctrl + F Displays the Find Clip dialog box.

F2 Repeats the last search.

Clip menu

Ctrl + D Displays the Video Filters dialog box.

Ctrl + A Displays the Audio Filters dialog box.

Ctrl + R Displays the Overlay Options dialog box.

Ctrl + M Displays the Moving Path Options dialog box.

Ctrl + I Splits a clip into separate video from audio clips.

Help menu

F1 Starts the online help.

Using the Shift key

Shift while inserting Splits existing clip to make room (only when Single-Track
a clip in the middle Ripple or Multi-Track Ripple is selected).
of another clip

Shift while selecting Allows you to select multiple clips.

clips

Shift + Ctrl Allows you to select audio clips while selecting video clips
and vice versa.

Shift while dragging Trims a title clip using the Trim Window.
the title clip edge
186 VIDEO EDITOR

Using the Ctrl key

Ctrl while dragging Copies the selection to another place in the Timeline.

Double-clicking

Empty video track Displays the Insert Video or Image File dialog box.

Empty audio track Displays the Insert Audio File dialog box.

Title clip Displays the Title Options dialog box.

Project Cues Displays the Rename Cue dialog box.

Video, audio or Displays the clip in the Source Window.

image clip

Video Editor Title bar Maximizes or restores the active window.

Title bar of the Docks the Timeline into the Video Editor workspace.
Timeline Window

Other Title bars Dock or float the window.

Info section in the Displays the Preferences dialog box.

Status bar

Preview Window and Source Window

Enter / K Plays/Pauses the preview of the project in the Preview

Window or the playback of a selected clip in the Source
Window.

Shift + Space Plays a preview range or pauses the playback.

Space Plays from the current pointer position up to the mark out
frame or pauses the playback.

Esc Stops the playback for the Source and Preview Window.

Page Up Displays the frame of the previous edit point.

Left & Right arrows Goes back or forward in the project or a selected clip by
one frame Page Down Displays the frame of the next edit
point.
 CHAPTER 10: SHORTCUTS 187

F3 Create Mark-in.

F4 Create Mark-out.

Shift + F3 Clears a mark-in or mark-out point at the current frame, if

any.

F5 Adds or deletes a cue.

Home Jumps to the beginning of the project (Preview Window)

or goes to the first frame in the clip (Source Window).

End Jumps to the end of the project (Preview Window) or goes

to the last frame in the clip (Source Window).

Shift + drag Create new selection in the audio clip (Source Window
only).

F8 Refresh (Preview Window only)

Ctrl + 2 Activates the Preview Window.

Ctrl + 3 Activates the Source Window.

J Displays the previous frame.

L Displays the next frame.

Timeline Toolbar

C while selecting a Allows you to select a clip using the Clip Selection Tool.
clip

E while selecting the Allows you to select a track using the Track Selection Tool.
first clip in a track

Shift + E Allows you to select multiple tracks.

T while dragging Allows you to select clips that fall within a time range
using the Time Selection Tool.

M Selects a trim option (Normal, Overwrite or Stitch).

R Selects a ripple editing mode (No Ripple, Single-Track

Ripple or Multi-Track Ripple).

S while clicking on a Cuts a clip into two using the Scissor Tool.
frame
188 VIDEO EDITOR

Shift + S while Cuts clips in multiple tracks.

clicking on a position
to cut

F while clicking two Applies the cross-fade effect to the audio clips.
audio clips

Shift + F while Applies the cross-fade effect to all overlapping audio clips
clicking two audio in the audio tracks.
tracks

Z while clicking on Zooms in.

the Timeline

Shift + Z while Zooms out.

clicking on the
Timeline

Ctrl + I Separates the audio track from a video clip.

Ctrl + 1 Activates the Timeline Window.

Shift + Up & Down Displays all the video tracks in the Timeline.
arrows

Alt + Up & Down Displays all the audio tracks in the Timeline.
arrows

Up & Down arrows Moves the selected clip in the Timeline Window one track
up or down.

U Cut by preview cursor, if there is clip selection just cut the

clip, otherwise cut the whole tracks.

I Time stretch tool

Timeline

Space Play project

ESC Stop

Page up or down Previous or Next edit point

F3 / F4 Set preview range

F5 Add project cue

Arrow (up/down) Select or move clip

 CHAPTER 10: SHORTCUTS 189

Arrow (left/right) Jog

Shift + Arrow (up/ Scroll video tracks

down)

Alt + Arrow (up/ Scroll audio tracks

down)

Shift + Arrow (left/ Shuttle (scroll Timeline)

right)

Ctrl + I Split clip

F10 Invoke menu

Shift + 0 Change speed range to -8.0

Shift + 1 Change speed range to -4.0

Shift + 2 Change speed range to -2.0

Shift + 3 Change speed range to -1.0

Shift + 4 Change speed range to -0.5

Shift + 5 Change speed range to 1.0

Shift + 6 Change speed range to 2.0

Shift + 7 Change speed range to 4.0

Shift + 8 Change speed range to 8.0

Source Window

Space Play project

ESC Stop

Page up or down Previous or Next edit point

F3 / F4 Set preview range

F5 Add project cue

Arrow (up/down) Change active clip.

Arrow (left/right) Jog

190 VIDEO EDITOR

Shift + Arrow (left/ Shuttle (scroll Timeline)

right)

F11 / Shift F11 Add active clip into Timeline.

Ctrl + F11 Apply change back to Production Library.

F10 Invoke menu.

L Doubles the current play speed range.

J Increases by one half the current play speed range.

Production Library

Tab Toggle between Thumbnail View and List View.

Shift or Ctrl + arrow Select multiple clips.

key

F11 Add selected clips to Source Window.

F10 Open menu

J Increases by one half the current play speed range.

Effects Manager

Effects List

Insert Add effect

Delete Delete effect

Arrow (Up or down) Traverse effects in Attributes Panel

Arrow (Left) Collapse tree

Arrow (Right) Expand tree

Key Frame Controller

Ctrl + C Copy
 CHAPTER 10: SHORTCUTS 191

Key Frame Controller

Ctrl + F Fit to Window

Ctrl + R Reverse

Ctrl + V Paste Option

Insert Add keyframe

Delete Delete keyframe

Arrow (Down) Next keyline

Arrow (Up) Previous keyline

Scroll hot key Home, page up, page down, end

+ Zoom in

- Zoom out

Ctrl + Arrow (Left) Previous keyframe

Ctrl+ Arrow (right) Next keyframe

Shift + Arrow (Left) Move frame to the left

Shift + Arrow (right) Move frame to the right

Shift + Ctrl + Arrow Move keyframe to the left

(Left)

Shift + Ctrl+ Arrow Move keyframe to the right

(right)

Miscellaneous

Up & Down arrows Adjusts the volume.

Left & Right arrows Moves the selected clip(s) one frame forward or
backward.

Left & Right arrows Moves the Vertical Preview Line one frame forward or
backward when there are no clips selected (Also displays
the current frame when the Preview Window is open).

Page Up & Page Moves the Vertical Preview Line to the previous or next
Down project cue, clip edge, the beginning or end of a project.
192 VIDEO EDITOR

F3 Marks the beginning frame for a preview area.

F4 Marks the last frame for a preview.

Esc Closes dialog boxes without making changes.

Del Deletes a selected thumbnail in the Production Library.

Ctrl + 4 Activates the Production Library.

Ctrl + 7 Opens the Audio Mixing Panel.

F10 Invokes the options menu of the active window.

F11 Adds the active clip in the Production Library to the

Source Window.

Shift + F11 Moves the inserted clip from the Source Window to the
Timeline Window specified by the indicator position. If the
Timeline is occupied, the clips cannot be inserted.

Ctrl + F11 Applies the changes made on the inserted clip directly to
the Production Library or the selected clip in the Timeline.

Shift + Ctrl + Left & Allows you to select multiple clips in the Production
Right arrows Library.

Ctrl + 5 Activate Quick Command Panel.

Ctrl + 6 Activate Trim Window.

Ctrl + L Select All

Shift + Arrow (left & Scroll Timeline View

right)

Ctrl + Arrow (left & Preview video (without scrub)

right)
PART II: VIDEO CAPTURE
1

GETTING STARTED

Video Capture is the program where many of your video creations begin. Here
you can view and capture ‘live’ video from a variety of different sources such
as HDV or DV camcorders as well as DVDs, TVs, or VCRs. Once captured, you
can then play back those files or take them into Video Editor to start
constructing your own video project.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Understanding the basics

Preparation
Improving video signal when capturing analog video
Preferences
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 195

Understanding the basics

Video Capture is designed to work in conjunction with an installed video source.
This can be an external video device connected to your PC using an analog capture
board, digital video interface card (e.g. IEEE-1394) or USB port. If you do not
have a video source installed, you can still use Video Capture to play back existing
video files.

Once you have your video source connected and playing, the video automatically
appears in the Video Capture video window. Otherwise, the video window displays
a color bar test pattern instead.

Video Capture’s program window

Depending on the video source connection used, some commands and

buttons in Video Capture may not be applicable and may be grayed out.
196 VIDEO CAPTURE

Standard Toolbar
Open
Save As Capture To Clipboard
Capture To File
Playback

Capture

Capture Properties
Video Format
Scan DV Tape
Audio Format
Video Display Select Capture Template
Video Source
MPEG Settings

Navigation Bar
Home Previous
Next
Forward
End
Rewind
Repeat

Play
Stop Mark-In
Mark-Out
Record
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 197

Preparation
Connect your camcorder to the PC via an IEEE-1394 interface card, analog capture
board or USB port, depending on the type of video source that you have.

Video Capture automatically detects any Plug and Play video devices, such as an
HDV or DV camcorder via IEEE-1394 FireWire capture card, connected to the
computer. The moment the device is switched on, Video Capture prompts a
message asking if you want to use the new device.

Connecting a DV or Digital 8 camcorder

After connecting your DV or Digital 8 camcorder to the computer, check if the
device is detected by your Windows system. If you installed an IEEE-1394 card on
your computer, check also if the card is detected.

To check if the IEEE-1394 card and digital camcorder are detected:

1. Insert your video tape into the camcorder and switch it on. Make sure it is in
playback mode (usually named VTR or VCR). Check your camcorder's manual
for specific instructions.
2. Open the Control Panel, then open System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3. Make sure the following device names are listed in the Device Manager.
Under Windows XP or Windows Me:
• 1394 Bus host controllers
• Imaging devices/<Brand name> DV Camcorder (The brand name depends
on the DV camcorder connected to the IEEE-1394 interface.)
Under Windows 2000 or Windows 98SE:
• 1394 Bus Controller
• Image Device: Microsoft DV Camera and VCR (For Microsoft DV driver only.)
• Sound, video and game controllers: 1394 camcorder (For Texas Instruments
DV driver only.)
198 VIDEO CAPTURE

Windows XP: Device Manager Windows 2000: Device Manager

In addition to commonly used Texas Instruments and Microsoft DV drivers,

there are other drivers available. Consult your camcorder's manual for
suitable drivers.

Connecting an HDV camcorder

MediaStudio Pro currently supports the following Sony and JVC high-definition
camcorders and VTRs:

• Sony HVR-Z1
• Sony HDR-FX1
• Sony HVR-M10N
• JVC GR-HD1
• JVC JY-HD10U
• JVC GR-PD1
• JVC GR-PD1EK

After connecting your HDV camcorder to the IEEE-1394 port, check whether or not
your camcorder (or deck) has been properly detected by your computer by
following the guidelines below.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 199

Sony HDV camcorder

If you have connected your Sony HDV camcorder before to your computer, check
the Device Manager to see if your camcorder is detected as a DV device (left
image below) or AV/C tape device (right image below). If the camcorder is
detected as a DV device, you can capture DV footage. If the camcorder is detected
as an AV/C tape device, you can capture HDV footage.

DV mode HDV mode

The Sony HDV camcorder can be detected only under Windows XP Service
Pack 2.

JVC HD camcorder
If you have connected your JVC HD camcorder before to your computer, check the
Device Manager to see if your camcorder is detected as a DV device (left image
below) or JVC tape device (right image below).
200 VIDEO CAPTURE

DV mode

MPEG-2 mode
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 201

If the camera is detected as a DV device, follow the procedure below to switch it to

MPEG-2 mode. If the camcorder is detected as a JVC tape device, you don't have
to do the procedure. You can directly run Video Capture and start capturing your
video.

To switch the JVC HD camcorder to MPEG-2 mode, you only have to do the
procedure on the next page once.

If you have not connected your JVC HD camcorder before to your computer, follow
the procedure below starting from step 5.

To switch the JVC HD camcorder to MPEG-2 mode:

1. Turn on your camcorder and flip open the camcorder's LCD monitor to reveal
the camera panel. In the camera panel, switch i.LINK OUT to DV and switch
off your camcorder.
2. Connect your JVC HD camcorder to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using the
IEEE-1394 cable.
3. Turn on your camcorder and switch it to Play mode. Check the Device
Manager to see if your camcorder is detected.
4. Switch off your camcorder and unplug the camcorder from the computer.
5. Turn on your camcorder. Flip open the camcorder's LCD monitor to reveal the
camera panel. In the camera panel, switch i.LINK OUT to MPEG2 and switch
off your camcorder.
6. Connect your JVC HD camcorder again to your computer's IEEE-1394 port using
the IEEE-1394 cable.
7. Turn on your camcorder and switch it to VTR mode.
8. The Found New Hardware Wizard will open. Select Install from a list or
specific location (Advanced) and click Next.

If the wizard does not automatically open, go to Start: Control Panel -

Add Hardware.

9. Select Don't search. I will choose the driver to install and click Next.
10.Select Sound, video and game controllers and click Next.
11.Select JVC in the Manufacturer list and JVC Tape Device in the Model list.
Click Next.
12.A message will prompt you to continue installing the driver or not. Click Yes.
202 VIDEO CAPTURE

Connecting an analog video source

After connecting your analog source to the capture or tuner card, check if the card
is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the capture or tuner card is

detected:

1. If you are using a video device such as a

camcorder as your source, insert your
videotape into the video device and switch it
on. Make sure it is in the playback mode
(usually named VTR or VCR). See your
machine's manual for specific instructions.
2. Open the Control Panel, then open
System: Hardware - Device Manager.
3. In the Device Manager, double-click
Sound, video and game controllers.
Check if your capture or tuner card is listed
in this folder.
If your video capture board is correctly installed, running pictures should
immediately appear in the video window of Video Capture. If this does not happen,
then you need to tune Video Capture to your video source. To do this, click Setup:
Video Source. The Video Source dialog box opens with various options that allow
you to connect to a video channel and specify the type of video source you have,
as well as the television standard it operates on (these options may differ
depending on your video capture board). In general, you should at least be able to
select your video source, such as Composite or S-video and a broadcast signal,
such as NTSC, PAL or SECAM.

If you are unsure about any of these options, or how they work, refer to your
video capture board's instruction manual.

If your capture device supports multiple video sources, the Video and Audio
Capture Property Settings dialog box allows you to select your desired
video source such as Composite, Tuner, or S-Video. Likewise, if you have
multiple audio sources, this dialog box allows you to select your desired audio
source.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 203

Connecting a USB camera

After properly installing your USB camera, check
if it is detected by your Windows system.

To check if the USB camera is detected:

1. Open the Control Panel, then open System:
Hardware - Device Manager.
2. In the Device Manager, double-click
Imaging devices. Check if your USB camera
is listed in this folder.

Previewing video from your video source

Preview your video in your video device before capturing them into your PC. To
preview the video in your camcorder, switch to Capture mode. You can do this by
clicking the Capture icon on the Standard Toolbar or selecting View: Capture.

For HDV or DV devices connected to the PC via an IEEE-1394 FireWire card, make
sure that you set the proper Device Control and Capture Plug-in for you to be
able to control your device using the Navigation Bar and capture video.

To view existing or captured video, simply switch to Playback mode by clicking

the Playback icon on the Standard Toolbar or selecting View: Playback.

If you are only viewing video (not necessarily capturing), you may want to
hide certain features, such as the toolbars, for a cleaner look and feel. To hide
these, or show them once hidden, select the appropriate option in the
Toolbars & Panels dialog box, opened by clicking View: Toolbars & Panels.

Setting preview options

When previewing video in Capture mode, Video Capture allows you to control the
frame rate and frame size with the Preview Options dialog box (opened by clicking
View: Preview Options). When changing the frame size, keep in mind the aspect
ratio (16:9 or 4:3) of the video source. The aspect ratio is important so that the
video can be displayed without any distortion.
204 VIDEO CAPTURE

Resizing the program window

Whenever you change the frame size in Video Capture, the video window resizes
itself accordingly. To resize the program window for optimum viewing, drag its
borders to widen or lengthen it, or maximize to take full advantage of your
monitor’s screen size. You can also click View: Center to resize the program
window to fit snugly around the video window or center it on your screen.

Defining audio input when capturing analog video

If your video source has a soundtrack, it too can be captured with the video. Once
captured, it will play back in synchronization with the video. Exactly how sound is
captured depends on a combination of factors, namely: the video source, the video
capture board, and the sound card installed in your computer. In general, the
video capture board handles the capturing of video frames while your sound card
captures the audio portion. Video Capture then merges this information into the
resulting video file.

To define audio input:

1. Click the Audio Format button on the Standard Toolbar or Setup: Audio
Format to open the Audio Format dialog box. (This command is disabled when
your PC has no sound card and your video capture board does not support
audio.)
2. In the Name combo box, select an option for the audio data. The attributes of
the option are displayed in the Attributes combo box. (You can also select a
new combination of audio attributes directly from this combo box.)
If you define new attributes and wish to save them for later use, click the Save
As button. The Save As dialog box opens allowing you to assign a name to the
attributes. Clicking OK saves the attributes and the specified name appears in
the Name combo box.
3. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the audio attributes are now set for your
next capture.

Any sound you hear over your speakers is not affected by the selections made
with this command. To hear the changes, you need to have a sound mixer
utility that provides a monitor function. If you have a mixer, you can mix your
own soundtrack by combining the output from MIDI, WAVE, CD-ROM, and
other external sources (such as your VCR).
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 205

Improving video signal when capturing

analog video
The job of your video capture board is to convert an incoming analog video signal
into a digitized format that your computer can read. Once your video is displayed,
you may find that the colors do not appear as vibrant or are darker than you
expected. Such examples indicate that your video capture board and the video
source are not properly adjusted or calibrated. By having a well calibrated display,
you can capture and see video (particularly color) as it was originally recorded.

Calibrating your display

To get the best possible calibration, your video source needs to be able to generate
a color test pattern. These are often found in more expensive and professional
video cameras which allow videographers to record the pattern onto video tape
before they start recording a particular event. Later, they can then match this
pattern to another display device to ensure that the colors recorded by the camera
can be faithfully reproduced on that device, such as a computer monitor or a
television set. If your video source does not have test pattern generation
capability, then you will be unable to accurately calibrate your display. You can,
however, adjust the colors using your video capture board’s own controls (see
page 80).

Color calibration is not necessary if you are using a DV capture card and DV
source.

To calibrate your display:

1. Make sure that the test pattern recorded on the video source appears in the
video window of Video Capture and click Setup: Color Calibration. This opens
the Color Calibration dialog box displaying two color meters: a Vectorscope
and a Waveform monitor. A preview window displaying the current frame of
the video source appears in the upper right hand corner. (It is a good idea to
pause your video playback at this stage.)
The Vectorscope indicates the hue and saturation values of the colors in the
test pattern. The Waveform monitor displays the video source’s color signal
broken down into its component parts: Composite, Chroma, Luma, and
Parade. Composite displays all the component parts combined, Chroma
(shown in green) the color values and Luma (shown in white) the brightness
206 VIDEO CAPTURE

values. Parade uses a different method from the others and is applicable for
video capture boards which have support for the parade method. The preview
window is a small representation of the current frame in the video window. The
red slider tab indicates the horizontal scan line from which the colors evaluated
in the test pattern are taken.

See next page for a chart outlining typical color values of a well calibrated
display.

2. Move the red slider next to the preview window so that it intersects each
distinct color in the test pattern. (If you have a vertical pattern then there is no
need to change it.)
3. Click the Get Image button. The vectorscope and waveform monitor redraw
indicating the various color values at the point indicated by the scan line.
In a well calibrated display, the green lines on the vectorscope should touch the
white squares and the graph in the waveform monitor should display a staircase
pattern (see page 80 for a typical example). If they do not, then you need to
adjust the settings using the software supplied with your video capture board.
4. Leaving the Color Calibration dialog box open, click Setup: Video Display to
open the Display dialog box. This dialog box allows you to adjust various color
values such as hue, saturation, brightness, and contrast.
It is important to keep both dialog boxes open so that any changes in the Setup
dialog box can be reflected in the Color Calibration dialog box. To view these
changes, you need to make sure that the preview test pattern in the Color
Calibration dialog box redraws itself regularly. To do this, set the Get video
frame for every option in the Color Calibration dialog box to 1 second. This
ensures that at every second the preview test pattern refreshes itself, thereby
reflecting any adjustments you make. (If the test pattern only appears for a
short time, click the Get Image button after each adjustment to refresh the
preview window.)
5. Adjust the various color values in the Video Display dialog box and look at the
Color Calibration dialog box to see how your changes affect the preview test
pattern. Once the vectorscope and waveform monitor show a properly
calibrated display, close both dialog boxes and prepare for capturing.
When adjusting color values, keep in mind the following:

• Changing hue rotates the green lines on the vectorscope clockwise or

counterclockwise (depending on the degree of change)
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 207

• Changing saturation affects the depth of the lines, with low saturation
appearing closer to the center and high saturation closer to the edges
• Changing brightness and contrast affects the waveform in different ways
depending on your choice of options in the Video Display dialog box.

If you cannot satisfactorily calibrate your hardware, you can still artificially
readjust the video clip (after it’s been successfully captured) using the
Color Calibration command in Video Editor.

Typical calibration settings

At 75% amplitude, with 100% saturated RGB color bars, your color values should
resemble the following:

White Yellow Cyan Green Magenta Red Blue Black

Red 191 191 0 0 191 191 0 0
Green 191 191 191 191 0 0 0 0
Blue 191 0 191 0 191 0 191 0

When looking at a composite waveform in the waveform monitor, the typical

settings are about:

White Yellow Cyan Green Magenta Red Blue Black

100 65 50 50 30 20 20 0

White and black should always be 100 and 0 respectively, though the other
colors may vary slightly.

Adjusting color with your video capture board

If you cannot use color calibration, your video capture board should still provide
controls that allow you to adjust the contrast, color, and position of any video
displayed from an external video source. The Video Display button on the
Standard toolbar and the Setup: Video Display or Setup: Video Source
command (depending on your video capture board) give you access to these
controls. If you are not sure how to use them, refer to the documentation that
accompanied your video capture board.
208 VIDEO CAPTURE

Preferences
You can customize the way you work in Video Capture using the Preferences dialog
box, opened by double-clicking the Status bar or by clicking File: Preferences
[F6]. Control various aspects of Video Capture’s behavior, such as playing files
whenever opened, specifying the shuttle speed, or defining the background color
of the workspace.

Preferences dialog box

• Play file when opened plays a video file immediately upon opening in the
workspace. When clear, the file opens on the first frame.

• Return to first frame after playing resets the video sequence to the first frame
once the clip finishes playing. When clear, the video stops on the last frame.

• Display frame numbers when playing shows each frame number in the Status
bar as it is being displayed. When clear, only the starting frame number is shown.

• Display capture options before capturing opens the Capture Video Dialog box
every time you click the Record button. When clear, Video Capture begins recording
immediately.

• Image capture deinterlace downsamples captured images to minimize the file

size.

• Use Split dialog box for capture settings centralizes the capture properties with
settings derived from different dialog boxes (e.g., Input Source).

• Number of recently opened files specifies how many file names are stored in the
Recent History list found in the File menu.

• Maximum shuttle speed sets the maximum speed possible when shuttling through
a video file. In general, set a higher speed for longer files and a lower speed for
shorter files.

• Workspace background sets a background color or a bitmap image (BMP) as the

background in the Video Capture workspace.
 2

CAPTURING VIDEO

The first step in creating your own video production is capturing the source
material. This can be made up of several minutes of video or simply individual
frames that you want to incorporate into the project you are working on.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Tips for capturing video

Before capturing
Capturing video
Scanning a DV tape
Batch capturing
Changing a file's properties
210 VIDEO CAPTURE

Tips for capturing video

Capturing and video editing are tasks that require a lot of computer resources.
Your computer must be properly set up to ensure successful capturing and smooth
video editing. Below are some tips on how to prepare your digital camcorder and
optimize your computer for capturing and editing.
• For better workability of Scan DV Tape and camcorder device control, correct
timecode on the DV tape is a must. To do this, before shooting your video, use
the standard playback (SP) mode and shoot a blank video (for example, leaving
the lens cover on while recording) without interruption from start to end of a
tape.
• Capture at the best quality possible and then resample down if necessary.
Resampling up creates (interpolates) new data which results in lower quality
than the original.
• It is recommended that you close all other applications when capturing. You
should also turn off any automatically-launched software like screen savers to
avoid possible interruptions while capturing.
• If you have two hard drives in your system, it is recommended that you install
MediaStudio Pro to your system drive (usually C:) and store captured videos in
your other drive (usually D:).
• The choice of what hard disk to use is also crucial. Using a dedicated video hard
drive, preferably with Ultra-DMA/66 7200 rpm and 30GB free space, is
recommended.
• Make sure DMA is enabled for your hard disk. Open the Control Panel's System
program, and in the Device Manager, enable DMA (Direct Memory Access) for
all the hard disks (in the primary and secondary IDE channels) that will be used
for capturing video. DMA avoids possible drop frame problems when you are
capturing video.
• Disable Write-Behind Caching on the hard drive used for video capture.
• Regularly defragment your hard drive with a utility such as Disk Defragmenter
from the Systems Tools menu. (Fragmented drives force the hard drive to slow
down as it has to seek available free space to save a file.)
• Increase the Paging File (Swap File) size to twice your amount of RAM. For
instance, if you have 256MB of RAM, set both your minimum and maximum
paging file limits to 512.

For an exhaustive list of version-specific tweak for Windows, visit http://

www.videoguys.com/Windows_Tips.html.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 211

Before capturing
Before you start capturing, you need to enable device control first if you will be
capturing video from a digital camcorder. You also need to choose the proper
capture plug-in for the type of video format you want to capture. You can
customize these and other settings from the Setup menu.

Enabling device control

Device control allows you to play back and control
your digital camcorder in the Video Capture
program. To enable this feature, click Setup:
Device Control. In the Device Control dialog
box, specify the type of controllable device you
have in the Current device drop-down list. (For
instance, select HDV 1394 Device Control for
an HDV camcorder; select MS 1394 Device
Control for a DV camcorder). Click Options if
you need to define more parameters for the
selected device control driver. (Visit Ulead's web
side to know more about recommended settings
for different device control drivers).

Once device control has been enabled, Video Capture allows you to play, stop, or
pause the video footage by using the Navigation Bar or the keyboard hotkeys.

To control your digital camcorder using the Navigation Bar:

1. Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to your system and that the
proper Device control and Capture plug-in have been set.
2. Use the following buttons on the Navigation Bar to control your digital
camcorder:
• Rewind to quickly go to the frame(s) near the beginning of the video.
• Forward to quickly go to the frame(s) near the end of the video.
• Previous Frame to go to the frame prior to the current one.
• Next Frame to go to the frame following the current one.
• Home to go to the first frame of the video.
• End to go to the last frame of the video.
• Repeat to play the video in a continuous loop.
212 VIDEO CAPTURE

• Mark-In to set the current frame as the starting point of a video

selection.
• Mark-Out to set the current frame as the ending point of a video
selection.
You can also play the video footage at different speeds through the use of the
Shuttle Control.

Shuttle Controls

Choosing a capture plug-in

Video Capture provides different plug-ins for capturing different formats of video,
which include the following:

• Ulead DirectShow Capture Plug-in for

capturing DV. You can also use this plug-in to
capture analog video or TV footage in AVI
format.
• Ulead DSW MPEG Capture Plug-in for
capturing video in MPEG format.
• Windows Media Format Capture Plug-in
for capturing video in WMV format.
• Import DVD Plug-in for capturing video from
DVD. Using this plug-in will allow you to capture entire or selected contents of
your DVD.
• Ulead HDV Capture Plug-in for capturing video from HDV camcorders.
• Ulead MPEG-4 Capture Plug-in for capturing video in MPEG-4 format.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 213

Capturing video
Use Capture Video in the Setup menu to capture a single video sequence at a
time from any type of video source, be it a digital camcorder or analog source.

To capture a video sequence:

1. Connect your camcorder to the computer. (See “Preparation” on page 197 for
details). Turn the device on and set it to VCR or VTR mode.
2. With Video Capture open, start playing the video from your video source. If you
have a digital camcorder, use Video Capture's Navigation Bar for playback.
Whereas if you have an analog source, use the playback controls on the device.
The video should appear in the video window of Video Capture. If it does not,
check the connection to your video source and your video capture board setup.
3. When you reach the part of the video that you want to capture, pause the
playback.
4. Click the Record button on the Navigation Bar or select Capture: Video [F5]
to open the Capture Video dialog box.

If the Display capture options before capturing option is cleared in the

Preferences dialog box, Video Capture begins capturing immediately using
your current settings.

Capture Video dialog box: Options tab

214 VIDEO CAPTURE

5. In the Capture Method group box, select the appropriate method for
capturing. Auto captures video according to the time specified in the Auto spin
box while Auto (no time limit) continues capturing until you press the [ESC]
key. If you want to capture at fixed intervals, select the Manual option.
If you select the Manual option, you can define aspects of the capture by
clicking the Settings button. This opens the Capture Sequence Settings dialog
box where you can specify the interval between captures as well as the desired
length of video to capture.
6. Enter the file name to use for saving the first capture file in the Capture file
name entry box.
7. Select the Auto naming option to save the next captures as consecutively
numbered files. Each capture file takes its file name from the Capture file
name entry box, replacing the last four characters with sequential numbers.
For example, since the default file name is "capture", the suceeding capture
files will be saved as, capt0001, capt0002, and so on.
8. Select the Save to Production Library option to save your captures to the
Production Library's Media Library.

The Production Library is shared between Video Editor and Video Capture.
In Video Editor, you can access your captured video files from the
Production Library's Media Library.
9. Click the Advanced tab to see more settings and customize them according to
your needs.
10.If you want to retain your settings for the next capture, click Apply to save
them.
11.Click OK. Video Capture begins capturing according to your settings.

• When you click OK to start capturing, there may be a slight delay before any
capture takes place. This is because many machines first clear all available
memory. For best results, start your capture a few seconds before the video
you want to record appears in the video window.

• If you are in Preview mode when capturing the displayed video, the video
may freeze. If this happens, click Capture: Display When Capturing. This
allows the video to continue displaying while capturing. (This may, however,
adversely affect the performance of your capture as it requires additional
resources and as such frames may be dropped.)
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 215

Capture options
In the Capture Video dialog box, the Advanced tab contains options that allow
you to customize the way that each capture is performed. By carefully selecting
these options to match your system’s performance, you can significantly improve
overall capture results.

Capture Video dialog box: Advanced tab

• Force to use preview mode improves

captured video quality when capturing in
SVCD or DVD format. This is only
available if your analog capture card
supports this feature.

• Display message box before

capturing displays a confirmation
message dialog box after you have
clicked OK. (This is useful if you want to
wait before capturing.) When clear,
capturing starts immediately after
clicking OK.

• Play video file after capturing plays

back each file after capturing. Leave this
cleared if you want to continue viewing
your video source after capturing.

• Display message if frames are

dropped displays a report after
capturing whenever the specified
dropped frame threshold has been met.
For general capturing, specify 10%. (If you frequently get dropped frames, try
capturing at a lower quality.) Set this to 100% if you do not mind dropped frames or
are only capturing low resolution files.

• Pre-allocate the capture file creates a temporary file to place your captured video
sequences in. This improves performance as the hard drive does not have to search
for free space to store video data. (This size should match or exceed your estimated
capture size.)

• Synchronize video with audio ensures that during capture, the video portion
maintains correct timing with the audio portion. When cleared, both captures are
done independently by your system, which may result in bad synchronization
between audio and video data, particularly if the audio is a “talking head”. If the
audio is a background music, then selecting this option has little effect.

• Chunk granularity matches the size of each data chunk to be captured with your
target hard drive's cluster size. Matching sizes ensures more efficient data transfer
216 VIDEO CAPTURE

and thus improves capture performance. (In most cases, use the default unless you
have a reason not to.)

• Number of video buffers (1-1000) sets aside additional buffer memory to help
improve captures. (In most cases, use the default unless you know how much buffer
space you can afford.)

• Properties allows you to customize settings that are specific to the video source
format or to the target capture format. For instance, clicking this button opens the
DV Type dialog box when you have set up the program for DV capture, or opens the
Video and Audio Capture Property Settings dialog box when your video source is
analog video or TV footage.

• Default lets Video Capture automatically determine the best settings for your
system. Click this when you do not know what options to specify or are unsure about
your system's setup.

Capturing video from a DV camcorder

To capture Digital Video (DV) in its native format, make sure you use the Ulead
DirectShow Capture Plug-in. This saves the captured video as a DV AVI file
(.AVI).

Also, select Setup: DV Type (or click Properties in the Advanced tab of the
Capture Video dialog box), then choose whether to capture DV as DV type-1 or
DV type-2. With DV Type-1, the video and audio channels are stored unmodified
as a single, interleaved stream in the AVI file. With DV Type-2 (which is the
default), the video and audio channels are stored as two separate streams in the
AVI file.

The advantage of Type-1 is that the DV data does not need to be processed, and is
stored in its exact original format. The advantage of Type-2 is that it is compatible
with video software that is not specially written to recognize and process Type-1
files.

Follow the instructions in “To capture a video sequence:” on page 213 to capture
video. In addition, when Auto (no time limit) is chosen as the Capture method
in the Options tab of the Capture Video dialog box, select Seamless capture to
automatically save the captured video as another video file once it reached a size
of 4GB. Use seamless capture if your hard drive was formatted using the FAT32 file
system. For information on setting up seamless capture, see “Seamless DV and
MPEG capture” on page 219.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 217

Capturing video from an HDV/HD camcorder

After you have connected an HDV/HD camcorder and properly set up the device
for capturing (see “Connecting an HDV camcorder” on page 198), the Video
Capture program will automatically set the capture plug-in and device control to
HDV Capture Plug-in and HDV 1394 Device Control respectively.

• To check if your HDV/HD camcorder has been detected, select Setup: HDV
Capture Plug-in. You will see the name of the camcorder in the menu.

• To check if the proper capture plug-in and device control are being used,
select Setup: Change Capture Plug-in/Device Control.

The HDV Capture Plug-in converts the source video from your HDV or HD
camcorder into an MPEG-2 Program Stream (PS) video file when capturing it into
your computer. By converting the video, it allows you to take advantage of
MediaStudio Pro's SmartRender technology when you edit the captured video clips
in Video Editor. SmartRender is a technology that permits "changes-only"
rendering. This means that whenever you preview your edits or create a video file,
only the clips which have been altered will be rendered.

Follow the instructions in “To capture a video sequence:” on page 213 to capture
video. In addition, when Auto (no time limit) is chosen as the Capture method
in the Options tab of the Capture Video dialog box, select Seamless capture to
automatically save the captured video as another video file once it reached a size
of 4GB. Use seamless capture if your hard drive was formatted using the FAT32 file
218 VIDEO CAPTURE

system. For information on setting up seamless capture, see “Seamless DV and

MPEG capture” on page 219.

Direct MPEG capturing from a DV camcorder

You can capture video from your DV camcorder directly into MPEG format by
setting the capture plug-in to Ulead DSW MPEG Capture Plug-in.

To directly capture to MPEG format:

1. Follow the instructions in “Connecting a DV or Digital 8 camcorder” on
page 197 to connect your DV or D8 camcorder to your computer.

When acquiring video from an analog source, be sure that the analog
capture card you are using supports RGB or YUV capture.

2. Turn your camcorder on and set it to Play mode (or VTR/VCR mode).
3. Select Setup: Change Capture Plug-in, then select Ulead DSW MPEG
Capture Plug-in.
Also make sure device control is set to MS 1394 Device Control to be able to
directly control the camcorder in Video Capture. (Select Setup: Device
Control to check).
4. Select Setup: Video and Audio Capture Property Settings (or click
Properties in the Advanced tab of the Capture Video dialog box). Select
Customize then click Advanced.

You can also choose the DVD, VCD or SVCD format if you plan to burn a
disc for playback on home DVD players.

5. In the MPEG Settings dialog box, select User Defined 1 or User Defined 2
from the Templates drop-down list.
6. Select whether to capture in MPEG-2 or MPEG-1 format from the MPEG type
drop-down list.
7. Select either to use Constant bit rate (CBR) or Variable bit rate (VBR) to
encode your video file. When CBR is selected, the data rate entered will be
used all the time regardless of the amount of information of the video. It may
fluctuate at some points but overall it will try to approximate the data rate
entered. When VBR is selected, the data rate will adjust itself depending
whether the material is simple or complex. It will not exceed the data rate
entered in the box.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 219

8. Under Audio, set Audio format to Mono, Stereo or Joint Stereo (often used in
MPEG compression). Also choose an Audio frequency (44100Hz is considered
CD quality) and Audio bit rate (White Book MPEG-1 audio is 224 kbps).
9. To capture video, follow the steps in “To capture a video sequence:” on
page 213.

Seamless DV and MPEG capture

MediaStudio Pro runs on Windows operating systems and is subject to limitations
in file size when capturing or rendering video. Video Capture automatically
performs seamless capture, saving video into a new file every time the
maximum allowable file size for a single video file has been reached.

Seamless capture will be performed only when capturing DV Type-1 or DV Type-2

(from DV camcorder), or when capturing MPEG video (from an HDV/HD camcorder,
DV camcorder or analog capture device). The maximum captured file size per
video file is 4 GB in Windows operating systems (such as Windows 98 SE and Me)
that use the FAT 32 partition file system. Captured video data in excess of 4 GB
are automatically saved to a new file. In Windows 2000 and Windows XP which can
use the NTFS file system, there is no limit in the captured file size.

To enable seamless capture:

1. Select Seamless capture in the Options tab of the Capture Video dialog
box.
2. By default, the maximum file size specified in the Cut file when file size
reaches option is 4 GB. If you want to lower the file size for each video file,
enter the desired file size.
3. Select Cut when scene is detected, then select one of these options:
• Always Cuts the file whenever there is a scene change.
• At first scene after Cuts the file when the captured video file size
exceeds the value entered in the box.
• At file size limitation Cuts the file when the size reaches the value in
the Cut file when file size reaches box.
• At date change Cuts the file whenever the recording date or time
changes.

Seamless capture is not available in VFW (Video For Windows) capture.

220 VIDEO CAPTURE

Direct WMV capturing

Video Capture allows you to capture video from any type of video source straight
to Windows Media Video (WMV) format. WMV is an extensible file format that
handles synchronized multimedia data and supports “live content” transmission
over a wide array of networks.

To directly capture to WMV format:

1. Connect your camcorder to the computer. (See “Preparation” on page 197 for
details). Turn the device on and set it to VCR or VTR mode.

When acquiring video from an analog source, be sure that the analog
capture card you are using supports RGB or YUV capture.

2. In Video Capture, select Setup: Change Capture Plug-in.

3. In Current capture plug-in, select Windows Media Format Capture Plug-
in.
4. Select Setup: Video and Audio Capture Property Settings (or click
Properties in the Advanced tab of the Capture Video dialog box) to choose a
profile that contains capture settings for WMV. See “Selecting a profile” on
page 220 for details.
5. To capture video, follow the steps in “To capture a video sequence:” on
page 213.

Selecting a profile
The quality of a WMV file depends on the profile it is using. A Profile covers
various attributes for a Windows Media Format file such as bit rate, number and
type of streams, compression quality, frame size and so on. When capturing video
directly to WMV format, Video Capture uses the default profile to complete the
capturing process. You also have the option to select other profiles to attain
preferred captured file quality.

To select a profile:
1. Select Setup: Video and Audio Capture Property Settings (or click
Properties in the Advanced tab of the Capture Video dialog box).
2. In the dialog box, click Select to open Select Profile.
3. Select the profile you want to use for capturing. The generated WMV file will
depend on the profile that you pick. Click OK.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 221

Editing and customizing a video profile

The Select Profile dialog box lists all the profiles available in your system. From
this dialog box, you can open the Manage Profiles dialog box to edit, create,
remove, and duplicate a profile.

To edit and customize a profile:

1. Select Setup: Video and Audio Capture Property Settings (or click
Properties in the Advanced tab of the Capture Video dialog box).
2. In the dialog box, click Select to open Select Profile.
3. Under Select Profile, click Customize to open the Manage Profiles dialog box.
4. Manage Profiles lists all the available profiles installed in your computer. The
profiles are categorized into two types: System defined profiles and Custom
profiles. Simply click Edit to modify attributes of a Custom profile.

• System-defined profiles cannot be edited directly. You must create a

copy before editing the corresponding attributes. To do this, select a
system defined profile and then click Copy. Select the created copy of the
profile and then click Edit to modify the attributes. Clicking Edit invokes
Edit Profile. It will guide you in specifying your preferred attributes.

• You can also create a new profile by clicking New. This will lauch a task
wizard that will guide you in creating your profile.
5. In the General tab, specify a reference Name and Description for the created
or edited profile.
6. Select the Media types supported by the profile. You can also click Add under
Target bit rates to add desired bit rates for the WMV file.
7. Choose the remaining options according to your preference, then click OK.
8. Click Close in the Manage Profiles dialog box.
9. Click OK in the Select Profile dialog box.

About dropped frames

If your PC and video capture board have difficulty supporting a specified frame
rate, a message box may appear after capturing detailing how many frames were
captured and, of those, how many were ‘dropped’ frames. (This message box will
be displayed when the Display message if frames are dropped option is
selected in the Advanced tab of the Capture Video dialog box).

Dropped frames are ‘phantom’ frames which are created to ensure that the frame
rate is maintained. Whenever Video Capture or some other device encounters a
222 VIDEO CAPTURE

dropped frame on playback, it keeps displaying the previous frame until the
dropped frame or frames have passed. If a video has dropped a large number of
frames, then the playback will look very choppy. To reduce the occurrence of
dropped frames, you can lower the quality settings for your video. For example, try
a smaller frame size, higher compression, or a lower frame rate.

Capturing single frames

Capturing a single frame does not require you to specify as much information as
when capturing a video sequence. This is because the single frame adopts the
currently displayed video frame size and data type, and is passed directly to your
chosen destination – to the clipboard or to disk. You can capture single frames
from either an existing video file or directly from a video source. In the program, a
camera shutter beep is available as a reminder. Also, there are three output
destinations: Production Library, Image File, and Clipboard. Also, a Jog bar is
also available to make capturing a single frame easier for you.

To capture a single frame:

1. Connect your DV camcorder to your IEEE-1394 interface card.

When acquiring video from an analog source, be sure that the analog
capture card you are using supports RGB or YUV capture.

2. Turn your camcorder on and set it to Play mode (or VTR/VCR mode).
3. Run Video Capture.
4. Select the frame you wish to capture.
5. Click Freeze on the Navigation Bar (Pause, if playing an existing file) or
Control: Freeze [space] to stop the video on the current frame.
6. Click Capture: Single Frame or press [F8]. The frame is sent to the chosen
destination. (If you are capturing to a file, the standard Save dialog box
opens.)

You can capture a single frame without freezing the video source or pausing a
video file. However, you cannot be sure which frame you will get.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 223

Capturing a sequence of still frames

Shooting the entire duration of a flower blooming with a DV camcorder may be
three hours in length or longer. You can compress this length by capturing a
sequence of still frames at certain intervals from a DV device.

To capture a sequence of still frames:

1. Connect your DV camcorder to your IEEE-1394 FireWire interface card.

When acquiring video from an analog source, be sure that the analog
capture card you are using supports RGB or YUV capture.

2. Turn your camcorder on and set it to Play mode (or VTR/VCR mode).
3. Run Video Capture.
4. Click View: Capture to see the video on your screen. Click Capture: Video to
open the Capture Video dialog box. Select Manual as the capture method
then click Settings.
5. Under Capture Sequence Settings, set the attribute for the capturing work.
Set the capture interval time in Sequence settings. The capture engine will
capture a frame based on the set interval time. Select Capture duration and
set how long you want the capturing process to last. Click OK to accept the
settings and close the dialog box so you can start the capture process.

If the Capture duration option is not selected, you have to press [ESC] to
stop the capturing process.

Capture history
Video Capture provides a capture history dialog box to track the latest captured
files. Select File: Capture History to open the Capture History dialog box. The
video files can be sorted by file name, file size, or captured date.

Click Play to display a preview of a selected file. You can also use Capture History
to copy or delete of files to or from the Production Library of the Video Editor.
Press Info to view the file properties of a selected file.
224 VIDEO CAPTURE

Scanning a DV tape
Scanning the DV tape identifies individual clips, and provides a thumbnail or list
view of the entire tape contents. This is a fast and easy way of capturing video
from a DV or D8 camcorder into separate clip files based on the recording date and
time (that is, based on stops and starts of video recordings).

You can save the scan as a DV Album (SCA file) or as an HTML file which provides
a log of the entire tape for future reference.

To scan a DV tape:
1. Follow the instructions in “Connecting a DV or Digital 8 camcorder” on
page 197 to connect your DV or D8 camcorder to your computer.
2. Turn your camcorder on and set it to Play mode (or VTR/VCR mode).
3. In Video Capture, select Capture: Scan DV Tape.
4. Select your preferred Scan/Capture method from the selection in the dialog
box. You may choose one of the following:
• Scan from beginning Rewinds the tape to the beginning of the tape and
starts to scan. This method can be used to scan a new tape.
• Scan from current position Scans the tape from the current position.
This method can be used to scan a tape that has been scanned before,
and now, will just need to scan the newly recorded scenes.
• Scan from beginning and capture Scans the tape from the beginning
and captures all the scenes. If you want to scan the whole tape and
capture all the scenes, you can select this method to do it.
5. Select a Capture format. You can choose one of the following:
• DV Captures in DV AVI format.
• DVD Captures video as DVD-ready MPEG-2 files that can be burnt onto a
DVD disc.
• VCD Captures video as VCD-ready MPEG-1 files that can be burnt onto
CD.
• WMV Captures in WMV format.
6. Enter a reference name for the DV tape in Reel name. You may also enter
brief information about the tape under Description.
7. Click the Capture Settings tab.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 225

8. Under Scan options, select these options:

• Create index files Select to sequentially number the capture files based
on the specified file name in step 9.
• Quick scan Select to do a fast scan. Drag the slider to the right to
increase the scanning speed.

• Quick scan collects frames faster than the speed of the playback and
saves a lot of space in your storage disk. If the DV camcorder cannot keep
up with the speed, dropped frames may occur.

• This option does not produce index files.

9. Under Capture options, use the default Capture file directory for saving
capture files or change it to your desired folder. Specify a Capture file name.
10. Click the Scene Information tab.
11. Click Start to begin scanning the tape. Scanned clips are then displayed at the
left panel of the dialog box.
226 VIDEO CAPTURE

By default, scanned clips are displayed in Thumbnail view. You can change the
display to List view by clicking the rightmost icon on the toolbar.
12.If you selected to Scan from beginning and capture in step 4, clips are
automatically captured after the scan.
If you chose one of the other two scan methods, choose the scenes you want to
capture by selecting or clearing the check boxes on the left panel, then click
Capture Video to start capturing them.

Scanned scenes can be combined and treated as one before capturing. To

do this, select the scenes that you want to combine and then click Join on
the toolbar. To undo this action, select the combined scenes and click Split.

13.Click Save on the toolbar to store the scan list as a DV album (.SCA) or HTML
file.

Next time, you can click Load on the toolbar in the Scan DV Tape dialog box
to import the scan list.

Batch capturing
Batch Capture allows you to choose multiple video segments from your footage
and capture them all at once. You can use Batch Capture when capturing video
from DV or HDV camcorders.

To mark video sequences and capture them:

1. Connect your camcorder to the computer. (See “Preparation” on page 197 for
details). Turn the device on and set it to VCR or VTR mode.
2. Select Capture: Batch Capture.
3. Click Capture Options and do the following:
• Select Device Control to open the Device Control dialog box. Select MS
1394 Device Control if you have a DV or D8 camcorder; select HDV
1394 Device Control if you have an HDV/HD camcorder.
• Select Change Capture Plug-in. Make sure the Ulead DirectShow
Capture Plug-in is selected if you are capturing from a DV/D8 camcorder
or the Ulead HDV Capture Plug-in when capturing from an HDV/HD
camcorder.
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 227

4. Enter a Reel name and Description. (You can specify any reel name, but be
sure to change the name when you change the source tape or disc).
5. In Safe frames, specify the number of frames to capture before and after the
specified capture duration to make sure that all frames within that capture
timecode are included. For example, if you set a value of 5 frames and the
mark-in and mark-out times of a segment are 01:02:10:20 and 01:04:10:10,
capturing will start from 01:02:10:15 and will end at 01:04:10:15. (You can
trim out unnecessary frames later when you are editing).
6. Specify a Capture file name.
During batch capture, the captured files will be named sequentially. For
example, if the file name you specify is "batch", captured files will be named,
batc0001, batc0002 and so on.
7. When you are ready to start marking video sequences, click the Batch
Settings tab. Use the Navigation Bar to roll the footage to the location where
you want to begin marking video clips to capture.
8. Click the Play button to play the footage.
9. Click the Mark-In button on the Navigation Bar or press F3 whenever you see
the video you want to select for capture.
228 VIDEO CAPTURE

10.Click the Mark-out button on the Navigation Bar or press F4 when you want to
end a selection.
11.Repeat steps 10 and 11 until you have marked all the sequences of video that
you wish to capture. Each time you mark a section of video, the mark-in and
mark-out timecodes of a segment are logged in the batch list at the left panel
of the dialog box.
12.Click the Stop button after you have finished marking all the video sequences.
13.Click Capture Video to start with the capturing process. Wait for the batch
capture to finish.
After batch capture is complete, the Batch Log dialog box appears, displaying
information about each captured file.

The Batch Log dialog box indicates, under each file, whether or not there
are dropped frames during the capture. If there are dropped frames, click
the Recapture button if you want to try recapturing that marked portion
again.

14.To save the batch list for future use, click Save on the toolbar.

Importing and editing a batch list

In the Batch Capture dialog box, you can import an existing batch file or even a
Video Editor DVP file from which to capture. Using batch lists in this way allows you
to capture exactly the same source each time, and is very helpful for creating high
resolution files to replace low resolution files you may have been using for editing.

To import and edit a batch list:

1. To load an existing batch file or Video Editor DVP file, click the Open button on
the toolbar in the Batch Capture dialog box. Choose the appropriate file from
the Open Batch Capture File dialog box.
2. Click on the segment in the batch list that you want to edit.
3. To change the mark-in and mark-out times, either click the Mark-In and
Mark-Out buttons as the video plays back or enter the timecode values
directly into the Mark-in and Mark-out boxes. (After adjusting the timecode
values, click the Update button on the toolbar to reflect the changes in the
batch list.)
4. If you want to use this batch list again later (for example, to recapture at a
higher resolution), click the Save button on the toolbar, and in the resulting
dialog box, save the file as a batch capture file (BCF).
 CHAPTER 2: CAPTURING VIDEO 229

Changing a file's properties

Whenever you capture a video sequence, you must first specify a file in which to
save the resulting video. There will be times, however, when you wish to save this
video again to change its attributes, such as frame rate or the compression
scheme. (This is particularly true if you have a hardware compressed file, such as
MJPEG or MPEG, and you wish to play it back on another machine which does not
have the same hardware setup.)

Being able to accurately pinpoint frames also gives you more flexibility in editing
video. For example, you can first capture your video as low resolution files and
therefore have them occupy much less disk space. You can then edit them
considerably faster in Video Editor and, when ready to compile the final version,
you can recapture the exact frames at a higher quality. (You can also import the
DVP file from Video Editor, including any edits you have done, and have the device
capture the original video based on your edits.)

To capture from a controllable device, you first need to specify the frames you
want to capture by marking those frames and creating a batch list. You also need
to indicate a file to save the marked sequences to as well as provide a name for
your reel or video source. This is especially useful if your batch list contains
marked sequences from a number of different tapes or sources. When you perform
the capture, Video Capture will prompt you when it is time to insert the next reel.

To change the attributes of a file:

1. Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar or File: Save As [Ctrl+S] to
open the Save As dialog box.
2. Specify the name and destination for the file.
You can also append subject information to the file using the Subject and
Description entry boxes and assign a thumbnail image to the file by clicking
the Select button. If you plan on using the file in Video Editor, click the Save
to library option to automatically place it in the Production Library for easy
retrieval.
3. Click the Options button. The Video Save Options dialog box opens with four
tabs: Video Capture, General, Advanced, and Compression.
4. Select either Mark in-Mark out selection or All frames in the Video Capture
tab. Mark in-Mark out selection saves only the frames occurring between a
marked in and marked out section of the file, while All frames saves all the
frames in the file.
230 VIDEO CAPTURE

5. Specify the desired video attributes in the General, Advanced, and

Compression tabs.
6. Click OK. The Video Save Options dialog box closes and you return to the Save
Video File dialog box.
7. Click OK. The dialog box closes and Video Capture saves the file accordingly.
 3

SHORTCUTS

Video Capture has many shortcuts that allow you to access commands and
open dialog boxes without having to go through the menus.

In this chapter, shortcuts are grouped as follows:

File menu
Control menu
View menu
Capture menu
Help menu
Miscellaneous
232 VIDEO CAPTURE

File menu

Ctrl + O Displays the Open dialog box.

Ctrl + S Saves an existing video file.

Alt + Enter Displays the Project Settings dialog box.

F6 Displays the Preferences dialog box.

Ctrl + Q Exits Video Editor.

Control menu

Esc Stops the video clip being played and returns it to the first
frame.

Space Starts playing the video clip.

Page Up Skips back through the video clip.

Page Down Skips forward through the video clip.

<- Moves back a single frame.

-> Moves forward a single frame.

Home Goes to the first frame of the video clip.

End Goes to the last frame of the video clip.

Shift + F Goes to a specified location using a controllable device

(Only works if you are in Capture Mode).

Ctrl + R Plays the video clip in a continuous loop (Only works if

you are in Playback Mode).

F3 Selects an individual frame and/or the start of a selected

area.

F4 Defines the end of a selected area.

Delete Closes the door if a controllable device is installed.

Insert Opens the door if a controllable device is installed.

 CHAPTER 3: SHORTCUTS 233

View menu

Ctrl + P Displays the video in Playback mode.

Ctrl + E Switches to Capture Mode. It displays a preview of the

video you intend to capture.

Ctrl + V Displays the video directly from the capture board.

Capture menu

F5 Displays the Video Capture dialog box.

Ctrl + C Captures a single frame to the clipboard.

F8 Captures a single frame to a file.

Help menu

F1 Displays the contents for Video Capture Help.

Miscellaneous

Double-click Status Opens the Preferences dialog box.

bar

Double-click any Floats or docks the toolbar.

toolbar

Shift + F10 Invokes the About Windows Help dialog box.

Double-click title bar Maximizes or restores the active window.

Esc Closes dialog boxes without making changes.

234 VIDEO CAPTURE
PART III: AUDIO EDITOR
1

GETTING STARTED

Audio Editor is the MediaStudio Pro program that gives you command over
your soundtrack. With it, you can play, record and edit the audio components
of your video project with drag-and-drop ease and a click of the mouse.
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 237

Understanding the basics

To get started with Audio Editor, you can either open an existing audio file or
record sound from an external device such as an audio CD, microphone or VCR.
Sound appears in an edit window as a waveform. This waveform represents the
various positive and negative peaks that a natural sound wave makes. If it is a
mono file (single channel), only one waveform is present, while stereo files (two
channels) have two waveforms representing the left and right channels
accordingly. Audio Editor displays sound in this manner to help you visualize the
contents of an audio file and make enhancing it easy.

Audio Editor's program window

238 AUDIO EDITOR

Toolbar

Run Mixer Mark-In/ Previous

Program Mark-Out Cue Next Cue

Fit Selection Add a Cue Switch View Zoom Slider

in Window

Overview Strip

View box

Selection area
Active waveform

Navigation Bar

Play/Pause Record

Stop Home Next Mark-In/Mark-Out

Previous End
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 239

Playing audio files

To play an audio file, click the Play button on the Navigation Bar or click Control:
Play [SPACE BAR]. The file starts playing from the current cursor position. To
stop playback, click the Stop button or click Control: Stop [ESC]. The cursor
returns to the beginning of the file.

• To move the cursor to the start of a file, click Control: Go To Start

[CTRL+HOME]. To move it to the end, click Control: Go To End
[CTRL+END].

• If you have created a selection area you can play the contents of the
selection by selecting Control: Play Selection [F2].

Creating a new audio file

To record sound, you first need to open a new edit window. If you do not open a
new edit window, the sound is recorded into the currently active window using the
properties of that window for the recording.

To open a new edit window:

1. Click File: New [Ctrl+N] to open the New dialog box.
2. Select the sampling rate you want to use from the Sampling rate group box.
The sampling rate determines how many portions (samples) of audio data
appear each second and is measured in kilohertz. The more samples a file
contains, the better the audio reproduction; the downside is increased file size.
3. Select the number of channels to use from the Channels group box.
4. Select the Sample size you want to use from the Sample size group box.
The sample size specifies how much memory is allocated to store the audio
data. In most cases 8-bit files produce adequate results without sacrificing too
much in quality. If you want the best possible audio quality, then choose 16-bit.
This does, however, result in a file twice the size of an 8-bit audio.
5. To record sound, follow the steps in “Recording sound” on page 243.
6. Select File: Save to save the recording as a new audio file.

Saving files
Save your audio files using the Save or Save As command. For previously saved
files, clicking Save instantly overwrites the existing file with the new data. Save
240 AUDIO EDITOR

As opens the Save Audio File dialog box where you can specify a new name and/or
destination.

There is also an option where you can directly save the audio file into the
Production Library of Video Editor, saving you the trouble of having to import it
when using Video Editor.

If the saved audio file is included as a track in a Video Editor project, the track
is automatically updated.

Saving files to a video

Apart from saving audio as a wave file, you can also save it as an audio track to an
existing AVI or MOV file. If the file contains an original audio track, the track is
overwritten with the new data. (If the waveform is longer in duration than the
video, it is truncated to the video length.)

Changing audio properties

After saving a file, you may find that you need to change its attributes, particularly
if you are planning on mixing it with other files that have different properties.

To change audio properties, click Edit: Convert To. In the dialog box that opens,
you can choose to change the sampling rate, channels and sample size according
to your needs. Once you click OK, the dialog box closes and the waveform is
changed accordingly.

Increasing attributes, such as adding an extra channel or increasing the

sample size, does not result in an improvement in the sound of the file. This is
because the attributes of an audio file are already determined at the time of
its creation.

Zooming
When you edit a waveform, you may want to see part of it in greater detail or
display it in a more compressed manner. You can do this in three ways: click View:
Zoom In and Zoom Out, by dragging the Zoom Slider, or by dragging on the
borders of the Global View Panel of the Overview Strip. (The amount you can
zoom depends on the size of the edit window, the length of the waveform and the
amount of the waveform shown in the window.)
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 241

In Audio Editor, it is possible to zoom down to the sample level. Editing at this
level, however, is often impractical as any changes you make may be
inaudible because of the sheer number of samples possible. For example, the
smallest audio file still has 11,025 samples per second.

A waveform at Fit in Window view

A waveform at Actual view

Changing the view of a waveform

Whenever you open an audio file, the waveform is displayed entirely within the
edit window. If you change the magnification of the window, the view of the
waveform changes, and parts of the waveform may be hidden by the window
frame.

To change your current view, drag on the Global View Panel in the Overview
Strip. This reveals those portions of the waveform previously hidden. To return to
viewing the entire waveform in the edit window, click View: Fit In Window
[CTRL+1]. (To view the waveform at 1x, click View: Actual View [CTRL+A].)

If you have created a selection area, you can fit the selection to the edit
window by clicking on the Fit Selection in Window [Ctrl+F] button on the
Toolbar.
242 AUDIO EDITOR

Controlling the display and time unit of waveforms

In the Preferences dialog box (see “Preferences” on page 245), you can determine
the detail with which Audio Editor displays waveforms, choosing between a precise
scan and a quick scan. Precise scan produces a very detailed waveform, but
takes longer to redraw. On the other hand, Quick scan produces a slightly less
accurate waveform, but is much quicker at redrawing. In most cases, the Quick
scan option is more than adequate for editing at the seconds level. (In the
Preferences dialog box, you can also change the units used to indicate time along
the bottom of the edit window. You can choose from M:S:ms, SMPTE or as
samples.)

An example of the time unit (M:S:ms)

An example of the SMTPE unit (M:S:f)

An example of the samples unit (thousands)

 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 243

Recording sound
In Audio Editor, there are two methods to record an audio file. The first is by
recording sound to any open edit window (this can be an existing file or a new
"empty" edit window). The other way is to copy a sound file directly from a CD.

Depending on your system’s configuration, you can choose to record from a variety
of sources such as an audio CD, MIDI player, microphone, or MIDI file (before you
start recording, you need to specify the driver of the external audio source you will
be using, such as a microphone or VCR).

To record sound:
1. Connect the audio source into your PC audio card’s line-in jack. Test whether or
not the connection works by playing from the source. If you hear sound from
your computer’s speakers, then it is a good connection.
2. Run your audio mixing program by clicking the Run Mixer Program button on
the Toolbar or click Control: Run Mixer [CTRL+M]. (To use the Windows
default mixer, click Start: Programs - Accessories: Entertainment -
Volume Control.)
3. Make active the edit window you want to record the sound into and click the
Record button on the Navigation Bar or click Control: Record [CTRL+R]. A
message box appears displaying the current recording level.

Set Recording Level dialog box

4. Adjust the recording level with the controls on the mixer control panel. For
better recording quality, your peak level should stay close to, but not touch, the
right side of the indicator.
5. Click Start. A message box appears telling you that Audio Editor is recording.
Click Stop in the message box to end recording. The new recording appears in
the active edit window at the current cursor position.
244 AUDIO EDITOR

To copy tracks directly from an audio CD:

1. Insert the audio CD in the disc drive.
2. Select Control: Record from CD. The Sound Selection dialog box opens.
3. Determine the capture sound quality, using Format and Attributes, for the
audio file that you will be capturing. Click Save As to save your settings as a
sound template. By saving it, you will be able to use the same attributes to
capture from an audio CD in the future. Click OK to open the Select Song
Track dialog box.
4. Select the desired track(s) then click Start. Audio Editor will begin copying the
selected track(s).
5. The captured file will appear on the workspace. Select File: Save As to save
the captured audio file. You can save the audio file in the Media Library folder of
the Video Editor Production Library so you can access it right away when using
Video Editor.

Tips for determining audio quality

Generally, it is quite straight forward to determine the properties you should use
for recording a waveform. The determining factors are the file size and the type of
speakers the audio will be played back over. For example, if disk space is limited
and the sound is intended for playing over small computer speakers, then there is
no need for CD quality sound. Likewise, if you plan on playing your files over
amplified speakers directly from your hard disk, then you would want more than
just telephone quality. The following chart offers you some ideas of the different
types of audio quality possible and how they affect file size.

Quality Properties File size

(compressed: 10 secs)
Telephone 11,025 KHz, 8-bit, Mono 107 KB
Radio 22,050 KHz, 8-bit, Mono 215 KB
CD 44,100 KHz, 16-bit, Stereo 1,720 KB
 CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 245

Preferences
You can customize the way you work in Audio Editor using the Preferences dialog
box, opened by clicking File: Preferences [F6] or by double-clicking on the
Status Bar. Here, you can control the display of the waveform, the time format
used, and assign a mixer program for recording audio files.

Preferences dialog box

• X-Axis unit [Time Format] specifies the unit of time for each edit window.
Selecting the Time (M:S.ms) option displays audio file information in minutes,
seconds and milliseconds. The SMPTE (M:S:frame) option shows the time in
minutes, seconds and frames. This is especially helpful if you are editing audio for
use in Video Editor as it allows you to match the audio portions with each frame of a
video sequence. You can choose between film (24 fps), PAL (25 fps) and NTSC (30
fps), or, for irregular frame rates define your own, such as 15, for example. For
detailed editing of audio, select the Samples option; this displays time in samples
per second. For example, if your sampling rate is 11.025 KHz, then the waveform
shows 11,025 sample points per second.

• Waveform display controls the detail with which Audio Editor draws waveforms.
Selecting the Precise scan option produces a very detailed waveform, but may take
more time to redraw because of the extra information. The Quick scan option
produces a slightly less accurate waveform but is much quicker at redrawing. In most
cases the Quick scan option is more than adequate for editing at the seconds level.
If you want to go to the sample level, then select the Precise scan.

• Move cursor when playing moves the cursor along the waveform whenever you
play audio files. If you are low on memory, clear this option as it requires extra
resources.

• Snap to cues makes selection areas snap to any nearby cues.

• Number of recently opened files specifies how many file names are stored in the
Recent History list found in the File menu.

• Mixer program defines the path and name of the mixer program to use when
recording. (This program will open whenever you click the Run Mixer Program
button on the Toolbar or click Control: Run Mixer [CTRL+M].)
246 AUDIO EDITOR
 2

EDITING AUDIO FILES

With your computer and Audio Editor, trimming and enhancing audio tracks for
your audio and video projects become greatly simplified and significantly
easier. With a number of advanced audio effects and enhancements, Audio
Editor will soon have you creating audio files that add impact to your work and
multimedia presentations.
248 AUDIO EDITOR

Working with selections

After opening an audio file you can edit the entire waveform or selected parts of it.
Unless a selection area has been created, any editing you do affects the entire
waveform.

Making selections
In Audio Editor, you can create a selection in the following ways:

• Drag your mouse over the area you wish to select.

• Double-click on the waveform or click Edit: Select All [Ctrl+L] to select the
entire waveform.
• Play the file and then click the Mark-in/out button on the Navigation Bar or
press F3/F4 whenever you hear the part you would like to select. (This method
is very useful for creating selections as your ear can hear the sound more
clearly than your eyes can 'see' it.)
• Drag on the waveform in the Overview Strip. (This can only be done if the file
has been zoomed in and there is space outside the Global View Panel to
select.)

Selecting an area of a waveform

• To deselect a selection area, click anywhere within the waveform or click

Edit: Select None [CTRL+K]. (Clicking the right mouse button deselects
the area without moving the cursor.)

• If you have placed cues on a waveform, selecting the Snap to cues option in
the Preferences dialog box 'pulls' any selection areas to the closest cue.
(Depending on your current zoom level, you may have to start and end the
selection area close to the appropriate cues.)
 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 249

Creating precise selections

While editing, there will be times when you want to make a very specific selection,
starting and ending at exact times, particularly if you are working in conjunction
with a video project in Video Editor. To make detailed selections, you can use the
Sample Information Window, opened by selecting View: Toolbars & Panels
then selecting Sample Information Window.

The Sample Information Window tracks the movement of your mouse pointer
as you move it, displaying the precise point in the waveform where the pointer
passes, as well as the highest and lowest amplitudes of the waveform at that
point. (If the times shown are not detailed enough, zoom in on the waveform.) The
two values on the upper box of the Sample Information Window indicate the
starting and ending positions for the area your cursor currently spans, which,
depending on your zoom level, may be the same or different. The lower box (for
stereo files there will be two, one for each channel) indicates the negative and
positive amplitudes in that region.

Clearing audio data

Often when you open or record a waveform there may be areas which you don't
want or no longer need. In such cases, you can remove them from the file by
selecting them and clicking Edit: Clear [Delete]. The selected area is removed
and the remaining waveform shortens accordingly, decreasing the duration of the
file. If you do not want to affect the duration of the file, click Edit: Mute. This
effectively erases any audio data (zero amplification), maintaining the duration of
the file while, at the same time, creating a "silent" part in the waveform. If you
want to delete a large portion of the waveform keeping only a small part, first
select the part you want and then click Edit: Retain. This removes all non-
selected audio data.
250 AUDIO EDITOR

Waveform before clearing

Waveform after clearing

Inserting audio data

After cutting or copying audio data, you can paste it from the clipboard into an edit
window by clicking one of the Edit: Paste commands.

• Insert adds data from the clipboard to an existing waveform at the cursor
position. This increases the duration of the audio file by the duration of the
pasted segment.
• Replace overwrites the waveform at the cursor position, replacing it with the
audio data from the clipboard. If the clipboard data is longer than the
waveform, Audio Editor truncates the excess.
• Mix opens the Paste Mix dialog box which allows you to combine waveforms by
adjusting their relative amplitudes. A 100% mix means that the data is mixed
at equal amounts. Lowering the mix for one reduces its amplification, while
increasing the mix for the other adds to its amplification. For more on mixing
tracks, see “Mixing tracks” on page 257.
• Fill replaces a selection area with the clipboard data. If the selection area is
longer in duration than the clipboard data, the data repeats itself until the
selection area is filled. If the selection area is shorter, Audio Editor truncates the
data accordingly. This command is disabled if there is no selection area.
• As a New Document creates a new edit window, filling it with the data from
the clipboard.
 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 251

Working with cues

Cues are the best way to bookmark spots in a waveform that you want to
frequently reference or come back to and edit. Once a cue has been created, you
can jump to it from anywhere in the waveform regardless of where your cursor is
located. Audio Editor also allows you to append information to a cue so that you
can denote certain features at that particular point in the waveform (for example,
marking the beginning of a long monologue, or denoting the point of impact
between two cars in a high speed chase).

To place a cue:
1. Click on the area in the waveform where you want to place a cue. (You may
want to zoom in for a more accurate placement.)
2. Click the Add Cue button on the Toolbar or click Control: Add Cue [F5] to
open the Add Cue dialog box.
3. Enter a description in the Cue name entry box (maximum 128 characters).
The default cue name, "&p" uses the time value of the cue's location for a
name. For example, a cue at the 1 minute 30 second mark would be named
"01:30:00".
4. Click OK. The Add Cue dialog box closes and a cue line appears at the cursor
position.

Placing cues on a waveform

You can also place a cue while a file is playing by clicking Add Cue or
Control: Add Cue.
252 AUDIO EDITOR

Managing cues
You can manage cues in waveforms in several ways, such as changing their
position and description, removing them from the edit window and switching
between them. For example, you can:

• Right-click the cue handle at the top of the cue line to view the cue name.
• Double-click the handle to change a cue's name (this opens the Change Cue
Name dialog box where you can enter a new name).
• Drag the handle of a cue to move it to a new position in the waveform.
• Drag the handle of a cue off either end of the edit window to remove it, or, to
remove all cues, click Control: Delete All Cues.
If a waveform has a large number of cues, you can navigate between them easily
by clicking the Previous Cue/Next Cue buttons on the Toolbar or click Control:
Previous Cue and Next Cue [Shift+Tab &Tab]. If you want to go to a specific
cue, click Control: Go To Cue [Ctrl+G]. This opens the Go To Cue dialog box
which lists all the existing cues in the waveform. To go to a cue, select it and click
the Go To button. The cursor then jumps to that cue.

Using cues with Video Editor

Whenever you save a file, any cue information is also saved with it. As such, you
can insert the file as an audio track in Video Editor and maintain the cues which
were placed in Audio Editor. Likewise, any cues placed on an audio track in Video
Editor can be viewed in Audio Editor (for WAV files only). This makes it much
easier when editing video as you can identify key areas in an audio track with
which to match the appropriate action in the video track.
 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 253

Enhancing sound
After recording audio, you may need to enhance the sound, such as adjust the
amplification, pitch, and more. Sometimes when you record audio data, you may
also get annoying background noise and general imperfections. For example, many
times the sound accompanying video footage comes out poorly, often because
something interferred with the microphone or recording equipment. In Audio
Editor, you can remove such noises as well as apply a number of studio quality
filters that correct and enhance the sound in your audio files.

If you only want to enhance a certain portion of an audio file, you must select
it first. Otherwise, the entire waveform is affected.

Changing the audio level

Audio level refers to how loud or quiet an audio file plays back at. Generally, you
can use your computer's volume controls to adjust this directly, but when it comes
to mixing files, you need to make sure that you first equalize the different sound
tracks so that they share a similar audio level, especially if they were recorded at
different levels.

To change the audio level of a file:

1. Click Effect: Amplify to open the Amplify dialog box.
2. Specify the percentage you want to change the audio level by in the
Percentage spin box. 100% is unchanged while anything above that increases
the audio level and anything below decreases it.
3. Click OK. The waveform changes to reflect the new audio level.

If, after changing the audio level, you find that the waveform peaks or touches the
top and bottom edges of the edit window (± 100% on the amplitude scale), then
you may find some distortion or noise has been created. In such cases, undo the
audio level and click Effect: Normalize. This adjusts the waveform's amplitude so
that it does not peak above or below the amplitude scale. (In some cases, you may
not see much change to the waveform after normalizing depending on the existing
audio levels.)
254 AUDIO EDITOR

Waveform before changing audio level

Waveform after changing audio level by 200%

Changing pitch
An audio file's pitch defines how high or low it sounds. A high pitch may be very
shrill, like a whistle, while a low pitch may be very deep, like a fog horn. To adjust
an audio file's pitch, click Effect: Pitch. This opens the Pitch dialog box where
you can raise or lower the pitch by dragging on the Pitch slider. Moving to the left
lowers the pitch, while moving to the right makes it higher.

Quantizing a waveform
When you record audio data, you need to indicate the sample size, or the number
of bits used to store the resulting file. This can be either 8-bit or 16-bit. The more
bits the better the quality of the recording, but the greater the size of the audio
file. If you need to reduce file size, but still want to maintain a good level of
quality, you can quantize the file by clicking Effect: Quantize. This command
opens a dialog box which allows you to specify the number of bits allocated to the
file, 1-7 for 8-bit files and 1-15 for 16-bit files. Often, a small reduction in the
number of bits is all you need to bring the file size down while at the same time
maintaining audible quality. (If you reduce the number of bits too much, you will
'clip' the sound, thereby producing noticeable distortion.)
 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 255

Working with silence

From a computer's perspective, silence is amplitude point 0 in a waveform (the
baseline). Silence is useful in audio editing, particularly for what it isn't rather than
what it does. For example, silence is responsible for adding and removing time to
an audio file, and timing is perhaps one of the most important aspects of any audio
sequence. For example, the sound of a door opening must be timed to occur after
the sound of the key entering the lock. Also, if you are creating a video project you
will have events occurring at specific times and these all require an audio track
that complements those times.

If you want to add silence to a waveform, click Edit: Insert Silence. This opens
the Insert Silence dialog box where you can enter the time range you want to
add in minutes, seconds, and milliseconds (M:S:ms). Once you click OK, the
silence is added to the waveform at the cursor's position, increasing the length of
the audio file accordingly. To remove silence, click Edit: Trim Silence. In the Trim
Silence dialog box that opens, you can specify to remove all silent areas in the file
or just those matching a specified duration, measured in M:S:ms.

Removing background noise

Unless you record in a rigidly controlled environment, such as a soundproofed
booth, every audio track you record will have some measure of background noise.
For the most part, it will fall within acceptable levels, easily drowned out by the
primary body of sound. If not, background noise can be very distracting and
significantly decrease the quality of the sound. In Audio Editor, you can specify an
acceptable threshold noise level by clicking Effect: Remove Noise. Any sound
which occurs within this level is then removed from the waveform. As background
noise is usually of a low amplitude, selecting a 2-5% threshold is often adequate.
Setting the threshold range too high, you run the risk of removing essential
data.

Waveform before removing noise Waveform after removing noise

256 AUDIO EDITOR

Muting a waveform
Often, when you are working with waveforms, you will want to remove part of it
without deleting the actual time it occupies (therefore silencing it). To do this, you
need to mute the waveform by clicking Edit: Mute. After choosing this command,
only the selected area of the waveform is silenced, leaving the total duration or
length of the file unchanged.

Calibrating files recorded from different sources

Not all recording devices have the same calibration or setup. It varies sometimes
in frequency modulation and amplitude. In such cases, you may find that files
recorded from these different sources end up with different baselines (point 0 on
the amplitude scale). Most of the time, this doesn't adversely affect the overall
quality of your tracks as the differences are minute. However, you may encounter
some files whose baselines vary dramatically and the result of mixing them
together produces unacceptable distortion and noise.

Audio Editor allows you to calibrate such files so that they all have matching
baselines. Simply click Effect: DC Offset. In the DC Offset dialog box, you can
drag the Offset slider to move the waveform above or below the baseline. Moving
to the right shifts the baseline up, while moving to the left pulls it down. (This does
not affect the amplitude of the file, only its waveform representation.) In this way,
you can calibrate any mismatched files to have roughly the same baseline before
you decide to mix them into the same audio file.

Waveform with an incorrect baseline

 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 257

Mixing tracks
Mixing tracks refers to taking two audio files and combining them into one. Mixing
essentially blends the data from the audio files so that their respective sounds
overlap and play through one another. When mixing, you can only mix waveforms
with the same properties and need to have the two waveforms already open in the
Audio Editor workspace. (To mix files with different properties, first convert them
or cut one and click Edit: Paste - Mix to paste it into the other.)

To mix two tracks:

1. Click Edit: Mix. The Mix dialog box opens displaying all files open in the
workspace which share the same properties.
2. Select the file you want to mix by clicking on it in the Mix with list box.
3. Set the desired amplification levels for each waveform (between 1-100%).
100% keeps the original amplification and anything below reduces it.
4. Click OK. A new edit window is created merging the two files.

Removing a mixed track

There will be times when, after combining a group of files together, you may want
to remove one of the files from the mixture. For example, you may be preparing
an audio project for a client and, after having created a master file, they decide
they want to remove the voice of one of their managers. Initially, this seems like
an impossible task as all the files have been truly integrated. Fortunately, the
solution is not as difficult as it seems. All you need to do is select the original audio
file containing the manager's voice and then click Effect: Invert. (This action
affects only the waveform, flipping it upside down, and does not affect the actual
sound.) Once inverted, copy the entire waveform and then select the edit window
containing the master file. Clicking Edit: Paste: Mix (leaving the mixing levels at
100%) pastes the inverted waveform into the file. As it is now the opposite of the
original file, it negates the manager's voice and, as a result, removes it from the
file.

You cannot remove a file from a mix using the Invert method if you have
already applied other effects to the mixed file. This is because any effects you
apply alter or shift each point in the waveform, and the inverse of the element
you want to remove will no longer match properly to the original.
258 AUDIO EDITOR

Applying special effects

Audio Editor comes with a number of special affects that you can use to add
impact to your audio files and provide enhancements which are difficult to replicate
when recording from the original source. These can be anything from performing
fades to the beginning and ending of a waveform to adding a variety of echo
effects, such as stadium and resonance.

Performing a fade
Performing fades is a frequent task in audio editing as you often need to control
how sound enters and leaves a certain scene or moment. This is particularly useful
if you want to give your audio a smooth or "rolling" start and finish. To perform a
fade, click Effect: Fade to open the Fade dialog box. A Fade graph allows you to
control how the fade is performed, offering a set of predefined fades or
customizable settings.

Fade dialog box

The first control point in the graph defines the start-fade amplitude, the second
and third points for the middle of the fade and the fourth point for the end-fade
amplitude (where 100% is normal amplitude). To help smooth out the fade, select
a Transformation curve option. A Linear fade produces a constant fade, while
an Exponential fade begins slowly and ends quickly. The Logarithmic fade starts
quickly and fades more slowly. For best results, it is a good idea to first experiment
with a variety of different settings.
 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 259

Waveform before applying a fade effect

Waveform after applying a Fade In / Fade Out effect

Changing speed
Changing the speed of an audio file is a useful way to increase or decrease its
duration, as well as for producing interesting distortion effects. When you click
Effect: Speed, the Speed dialog box opens with a slider for adjusting the speed.
Moving to the right slows down the file, thereby increasing its duration. Moving to
the left speeds it up, decreasing its duration accordingly.

Performing a stereo pan

If you have a stereo file, you can pan the audio so that it sounds as if the audio
moves from one speaker to the other, creating a "surround sound" effect. To do
this, click Effect: Pan and in the Pan dialog box that opens, alter the fade for each
channel accordingly. For example, a start and end level of 0% results in complete
silence while 100% leaves the output unchanged. As with the Fade command, you
can choose between Linear, Exponential and Logarithmic changes to help smooth
the effect.
260 AUDIO EDITOR

Reversing a file
An interesting effect in Audio Editor is the Effect: Reverse command, which
allows you to reverse a file so that it plays in the opposite direction. In most cases,
this will produce an unintelligible result, which can only be deciphered if you
reverse the file again.

Waveform before reversing

Waveform after reversing

Performing an echo
Echoes are useful effects which are often difficult to record naturally. Using Audio
Editor, however, you can overcome such recording limitations and produce echoes
that sound as if you are in a canyon or at a baseball game.

To create an echo quickly, click either one of the Echo commands available in the
Effect menu. Or, to customize one of those commands, click Effect: Echo. This
opens the Echo dialog box which allows you to define the three characteristics of
each echo command: Delay, Decay, and Bound. Delay is the length of time that
passes before you hear an echo, while Decay accounts for the loss of sound in
each repetition. Bound determines the next round of repetition and is repeated
until the echo fades away entirely. Below is a description of the characteristics for
each of the echo commands:
 CHAPTER 2: EDITING AUDIO FILES 261

• Long Echo has a long delay and a strong decay which results in longer
repetitions, though it fades away faster.
• Long Repeat has a short delay and weak decay, therefore making the echo last
longer (though each repetition comes in faster cycles).
• Resonance has a short delay with little decay and a very short bound. This
results in a quick and fast echo, sort of like an "audio shadow."
• Stadium echo is very similar to Long Echo but starts sooner and ends faster.

Waveform before applying an echo effect

Waveform after applying an echo effect

Performing a cross fade

A cross fade is where one audio track blends smoothly into another, head to tail. To
cross fade two files, click Edit: Cross Fade. This opens the Cross Fade dialog box,
which allows you to select the file you want to blend with. (You can only cross fade
between files with the same properties.) Select the file to cross fade with from the
Cross Fade with list box and then enter a value in the Cross duration spin box
(in M:S:ms) to determine how much of the two files overlap. If you do not specify
a duration, the second file is added to the end of the active file. Once you have an
overlap duration, select one of the Transformation curve options to specify the
type of fade to occur between the two tracks. A Linear fade produces a constant
fade from one to the other, while an Exponential fade begins slowly and ends
quickly and the Logarithmic fade begins quickly and ends slowly. When finished,
262 AUDIO EDITOR

click OK. The dialog box closes and a new waveform is created cross fading
between the two files.

Using DirectX Audio plug-ins

Audio Editor has a wide support for third-parties’ DirectX Audio plug-ins that you
can apply to your sound files. These plug-ins provide a platform for creating
dynamic audio files. DirectX Audio goes beyond the 16-channel limitation and
allows any number of audio tracks to be played simultaneously, up to the limits of
your system.

To use DirectX Audio Effects, you will need to install third-party plugins that will
become awailable system-wide. For more information on DirectX Audio plug-ins,
please visit Media Studio Pro product page.
 3

SHORTCUTS

Audio Editor has many shortcuts that allow you to access commands and open
dialog boxes without having to go through the menus.

In this chapter, shortcuts are grouped as follows:

File menu
Edit menu
Control menu
View menu
Window menu
Help menu
Miscellaneous
264 AUDIO EDITOR

File menu

Ctrl + N Starts a new video project.

Ctrl + O Displays the Open dialog box.

Ctrl + W Closes an audio file.

Ctrl + S Saves an existing audio file.

Alt + Enter Displays information about the audio file.

F6 Displays the Preferences dialog box.

Ctrl + Q Exits Audio Editor.

Edit menu

Ctrl + Z Undoes the last command.

Ctrl + X Cuts the selection area onto the clipboard.

Ctrl + C Copies a waveform or selection area onto the clipboard.

Ctrl + V Pastes the clipboard contents.

Del Deletes the selected area

Ctrl + L Selects the entire waveform.

Ctrl + K Deselects any selection area.

Control menu

Esc Stops playing the waveform.

Space Plays/Pauses the waveform.

Ctrl + R Records to an audio file.

Ctrl + D Records an audio file from a CD.

Ctrl + M Runs the Mixer program.

F2 Plays only the selection area.

 CHAPTER 3: SHORTCUTS 265

F3 Starts selecting during playback.

F4 Ends a selection during playback.

Ctrl + Home Goes to the start.

Ctrl + End Goes to the end.

F5 Places a cue on the waveform.

Shift + Tab Goes to the previous cue.

Tab Goes to the next cue.

Ctrl + G Displays the Go To Cue dialog box.

View menu

Ctrl + A Displays the actual view of the waveform.

+ Zooms in on the waveform.

- Zooms out on the waveform.

Ctrl + 1 Fits the entire waveform in the window.

Ctrl + F Fits a selection in the window

Ctrl + T Toggles between current view and actual view

Window menu

Shift + F5 Cascades all waveforms.

Ctrl + H Tiles all waveforms horizontally.

Shift + F4 Tiles all waveforms vertically.

Ctrl + P Displays the Audio Master Panel

Help menu

F1 Starts the online help.

266 AUDIO EDITOR

Miscellaneous

Double-click Title Maximizes or restores the active window.

Bar

Double-click Selects the whole waveform.

Overview Strip/
waveform

Double-click Sample Hides the Sample Information box.

Information title bar

Double-click Sample Displays the Wave Information dialog box.

Information box

Double-click Status Displays the Preferences dialog box.

Bar

Esc Closes dialog boxes without making changes.

Alt + Backspace Undoes the last applied command

Shift + Insert Pastes the clipboard contents.

Shift + Delete Cuts a selection area and places it onto the clipboard.

Ctrl + Insert Copies a waveform or selection area onto the clipboard.

PART IV: MORE PROGRAMS
More

MORE PROGRAMS

Ulead DVD MovieFactory and Ulead DVD DiskRecorder are separate programs
that you can access inside MediaStudio Pro. DVD MovieFactory allows you to
author DVD, VCD and SVCD to discs while the DVD DiskRecorder enables you
to add or record videos to a device that supports DVD-RAM or DVD-R. Learn
how to use these programs in this chapter.
 269

Ulead DVD MovieFactory

Ulead DVD MovieFactory provides you with the answer to your disc-authoring
needs. You can instantly create video or slideshow discs through a user-friendly,
wizard-type process and specific task oriented features. You can also enhance your
video by adding transition effects, text, audio, interactive menus, and many
others, or print disc label or cover to make your discs more attractive and
interesting.

With DVD MovieFactory, creating professional-looking DVD content has never been
easier.

Launching DVD MovieFactory

In Video Editor, select File: Export - DVD Authoring.

Immediately after that, you will be presented with a dialog box prompting you to
load one or several video files into DVD MovieFactory. Select the files and click
Open.

By default, DVD MovieFactory creates a DVD disc project and immediately brings
your video files to the Add Media step. If you want to create a VCD or SVCD disc
instead, click Back in the Add Media dialog box to go to the Start Project step
where you can choose the desired disc media that you want to create.

Start Project
This dialog box is where you can create a new DVD MovieFactory project or open
an existing one. You can create video DVD, VCD, or SVCD.

Click New Project and select any of the Output disc type targets if you want to
start a new project from scratch.

By default, the Existing project option is already activated if you are transitioning
from the File: Export - DVD Authoring command.

If you wish to proceed with earlier work, click on a blue folder icon to select an
existing project on your hard drive.

To proceed, click Next to go to the Add Media dialog box.

270 MORE PROGRAMS

Add Media
DVD MovieFactory lets you add content to your movie by adding video files of
different formats such as AVI, MPEG, and WMV and importing project files created
in Video Editor of MediaStudio Pro and Ulead VideoStudio.

To add a video/project file to your project:

1. Click New Project: DVD: Next to switch from the Start project page to Add
media dialog.
2. Click Add media in the Add/Edit Media page to launch the Open Video File
dialog box.
3. Locate the video file(s). You can select and add multiple files under the same
folder. Press [Ctrl] or [Shift] to select multiple files.
4. Repeat the above process to add more video files.
 271

Adding/Editing chapters
This feature is only available when Create menu is selected in the Add/Edit
Media page. Through this option, you can create submenus linked to their
associated video clips. See “Setup menus” on page 278 for details.

Represented as a video thumbnail in a submenu, each chapter is like a bookmark

for a video clip. Viewers can easily select a chapter, then the video clip will
immediately jump to the first scene of that chapter and start the playback. This
feature gives your viewers the freedom to choose a particular part of the movie to
watch. Note that these small video thumbnails only link to its “mother” video
without generating any additional physical video files. So, you don’t need to worry
about the possibility of unexpected file size increase.

Notes:
• You can create up to 99 chapters for a video clip.
• If the Create menu option is not selected, you will be guided to the Preview step
immediately without creating any menus after clicking Next.
272 MORE PROGRAMS

To create or edit chapters linked to a video clip:

1. Select a video in the Media Clip list.

2. Click Add/Edit Chapter .

3. Click Auto Add Chapters . You can also drag the Jog Slider to move to a
scene to use as the first frame of a chapter and click Add Chapter.

Tips:
• To use Auto Add Chapters, your video must be at least one minute long or have
scene change information.
• If you click Auto Add Chapters and your video is a DV-formatted AVI file captured
from a DV camcorder, DVD MovieFactory can automatically detect scene changes
and add chapters accordingly.
• If the selected video is an MPEG-2 file with scene change information, DVD
MovieFactory automatically detects each scene change and generates it as a
chapter when you click Auto Add Chapters.

Use Remove Chapter or Remove All Chapters to delete unwanted chapters.

Use Show or Hide to include or exclude the selected chapters from the menu then
click OK.

Export selected clips

This lets you select existing video files and save them to another video file format.

To export selected clips:

1. Select the video files from the Media Clip list in the Add/Edit Media page.

2. Click Export selected clips and select from a list of file format templates.
Select Fast Export DVD Compliant Video to save a DVD, VCD, or SVCD video
in MPEG-2 format. Fast Export Video lets you export a non-MPEG video file to
the same format without having to convert it. Select Customize to save to
other formats.
 273

3. Locate the folder where you want to save these files, and then enter a new file
name.
4. Click Save.

Note:
You can also export more than one video clip. The file name you entered followed by
a serial number will be used as file name for the succeeding clips that you export.

Setup Preferences, Project Settings and other options

Setup options for your projects in DVD MovieFactory can be accessed using the
buttons on the lower left corner of the program.

Settings and options

Use the options in this menu to customize the settings for video playback, save
your project, view information about Ulead DVD MovieFactory, visit the Ulead DVD
MovieFactory Web page, and register your copy of Ulead DVD MovieFactory.

Preferences
Select to set the program's working environment through the Preferences dialog
box.
274 MORE PROGRAMS

To open the Preferences dialog box, click Settings and options and select
Preferences or press [F6].

General
• VCD player compliant Select to make sure that the VCD created will
play in stand-alone VCD players.
• Anti-flicker filter Select to apply the anti-flicker filter to the menu
pages. The anti-flicker filter reduces the flickering that happens when
using a television to view the menu pages. However, this does not help
when the menu page is viewed on progressive scan devices such as
computer monitors or projectors. Select this option if you plan to view the
movie or slideshow on television sets.
• Always show relink message Select to automatically perform link-
checking between the clips and the associated source files. This is
important when the source file is moved to another folder location or has
been deleted.
• Resume all confirmation dialog boxes Select to have the confirmation
boxes appear even after the “Do not show again” option is selected.
• Max 30MB menus for set-top DVD+VR recorder Select to set the
maximum file size for DVD menus to 30MB to make the DVD compatible
with set-top DVD (DVD+VR) recorders.
• Check Ulead Web site every ... days Select to specify how frequently
the program checks the Ulead Web site for news and updates.
• Resample quality Specify the quality for all clips. A higher quality results
in better video but takes longer time to render. Choose Best if you are
preparing for final output. Choose Good for faster operation.
• TV system Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL/SECAM).
• Audio fade-in/out duration Specify the amount of time it will take for
the volume to reach normal levels when fading-in or the lowest level
when fading-out.
• Working folder Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.

Advanced
• Create index file for MPEG seeking performance Improves real-time
preview result using the Jog Slider. This option is specific for MPEG-1 and
MPEG-2 files only.
 275

• NTSC/PAL safe color Uses video friendly colors to ensure the display
quality of your menus when viewed on any TV system. This helps you
avoid the flickering problem on videos when viewed on screen.
• TV safe area Sets a margin (represented by a red border) in the
Preview Window of the Setup Menu page. If you set the TV safe area
at 10%, the remaining 90% will be your working area. Make sure that all
your menu objects are within the working area so that they can be
properly viewed on screen.

Project settings
You can view information about a specific project and customize its output settings
in the Project Settings dialog box. Click Project settings to open the Project
Settings dialog box.

• MPEG properties for file conversion Displays detailed information about the
selected video setting.
• Change MPEG Settings Select the type of video setting for your project.
Select Customize to personalize video settings.
• Display aspect ratio Select the output display of your project.
• Do not convert compliant MPEG files Select to prevent the program from
rendering DVD-compliant MPEG files during the rendering (output) process.
• Support X-Disc Includes Extended disc (XDVD, XVCD, XSVCD) compatible files
to your project.
• Two-pass conversion Improves the quality of the output video by analyzing
the video data first before encoding.
• Treat MPEG audio as non-DVD compliant Select to treat all video files that
has MPEG audio as non-DVD compliant. The MPEG audio track will be rendered
as the selected audio type.
• Play all clips first before menu Select to play all videos first, and then
display the menu.
• Auto repeat when disc playback ends Select to automatically replay the
video after disc playback ends.
• Clip playback Determines what to display next after the playback end of a
video clip.
276 MORE PROGRAMS

16:9 DVD
In addition to the standard 4:3 display, DVD
MovieFactory supports 16:9 display aspect
ratio for videos and menus. This lets you
create widescreen videos and burn them
onto a DVD disc.

To create widescreen videos, click and

select 16:9 from the Display aspect ratio
list in the Project Settings dialog box. The
video clips and menus are then adjusted
automatically.

Note:
Switching between 16:9 and 4:3 display
settings resets all menus to default.

Play and edit media

After importing the media files into your project, you can now play and edit the
content using DVD MovieFactory’s playback controls and editing tools. You can
change the output format of your current project anytime by selecting the desired
output format in Output disc type. You can also set the display output of your
project. Aside from the standard 4:3 display, DVD MovieFactory supports 16:9
display aspect ratio for high-definition, wide-screen digital systems.

When editing, there are many ways to browse through a video clip. You can use
the navigation control buttons or go to a specific timecode. You can also use the
Jog Wheel, which works the same way as the one found in most VCRs, to browse
through the video more quickly. Or you can use the Shuttle Slider to view the
video clip at a constant playback speed.
 277

Jog Slider

Jog Wheel

Shuttle Slider

Tip:
When using the Jog Wheel, you can browse through a video by moving the scroll
wheel on the mouse back and forth.

The right-click menu

Right-click a thumbnail in the Media Clip list to display a context menu that gives
you access to more options.

• Change Thumbnail Changes the current thumbnail display.

• Reset Thumbnail Restores the original thumbnail display.
• Media Clip Properties Displays the file, video, and audio properties of the
selected media clip.
278 MORE PROGRAMS

Trimming a video
You can trim a video using the Jog Slider, mark-in/out buttons, navigation
controls, Shuttle Slider, and Jog Wheel. Trimming allows you to modify the
length of the video according to your needs.

To trim video:
1. Select a video thumbnail in the Media Clip list.
2. Use the navigation controls or drag the Jog Slider to where the clip will start and
click or press [F3]. Alternatively, simply drag Mark-in to the starting
point.
3. Use the navigation controls or drag the Jog Slider to move to the point where
the clip will end then click or press [F4].

4. Click Play (or press [Space]) to view the trimmed video.

Setup menus
Create main menus and
submenus in this step. These
menus allow the viewers to
instantly access specific
portions of your video. DVD
MovieFactory offers a set of
menu templates to best fit
the purpose of each menu.
Custom-made menus are
also easily created.

See the illustration at the

right to better understand
the DVD/SVCD/VCD menu
structure.

In this example, Clip 1 has three chapters. When you click the Clip 1 video
thumbnail, it will jump to submenu #1. If you look at Clip 2, it has no chapters
assigned to it. Therefore, there is no submenu for Clip 2.
 279

To design the menu for your project:

1. Click Next to open the Edit Menu page.
2. Select the menu to modify in Currently displayed menu.
3. Select a template layout category in Menu template then double-click a
template layout thumbnail to apply it. Click Customize to make changes to the
layout.
4. Select Motion menu and specify the duration for the moving elements in the
menu.

Notes:
• A motion menu template has a special mark as shown at the lower right
corner of its thumbnail. You can see the result when you are previewing the
project later.
• When Motion menu is selected, the movie will use the beginning part of the
video at a fixed duration instead of the first video frame as button
thumbnails. The duration of the motion menus ranges from 1 to 30 seconds.
• Using motion menus will increase the file size. Check the disc space usage
indicator to make sure that the file size is still within the limit of the DVD.
Refer to the Required menu space to make sure the space for the menu
does not exceed the menu space limit of your selected output.
280 MORE PROGRAMS

• Use video backgrounds and buttons to enhance the appearance of your

menus. Select a customized template first then choose a video for your
buttons or background.

5. Click Background to specify the image or video background for the menu.
6. Click Background Music to set the background music for the menu.
7. Double-click the text description of the thumbnails to change it.
8. Double-click the thumbnail to choose a different frame for the thumbnail.
9. To view your menu, click Next to go to the Preview page.

To create your own menu template:

1. Click Customize in the

Setup Menu page to open
the Customize Menu
dialog box.
2. Select a menu template to
modify in Customize
template.
3. Double-click the thumbnail
of the Layout, Scene
Frame, or Navigation
Button to use.
4. To choose a new image to
use as background, click
Background.
5. Double-click the menu title or the text description for the thumbnail menu to
modify it.
6. To save the menu template for later use, click Add to Menu Template.

Note:
To use your menu template, go to Menu template library at the Setup Menu page
and select Favorites from the list. Double-click your menu template to apply it.
 281

Manipulating objects
You can resize a menu placeholder by clicking it and dragging the handles. Except
for the thumbnail number, you can also move and align menu objects anywhere in
the Preview Window.

To easily align objects in your menu, right-click the Preview Window and select
Show Grid Line. You can use these grid lines as reference when dragging the
menu objects to the desired position. Make sure that the objects are within the TV
safe area (defined by a border with red dotted lines). Other right-click menu
commands include:

• Reset Restores the original layout of the menu page.

• Keep Aspect Ratio Proportionally retains the aspect ratio of the thumbnail
images when resizing.

Displayed thumbnail and text style

After customizing your menu pages, you can edit your menu objects by double-
clicking them in the Preview Window. Double-click a menu button to open a
dialog box where you can change the menu thumbnail preview. To edit the text
objects on your menu, double-click the selected menu heading or text description.
282 MORE PROGRAMS

Layout settings
You can then choose to apply the same settings to other menu pages in your
project. To do this, click Layout Settings in the Options Panel and select Apply
to All Main Menus.

Preview
Now, it’s time to view your video project and do a final check before you burn it
onto a disc.

To preview your video project:

1. If you applied motion menu or background video in menus, select Preview
motion menu to the see their behaviors.

2. Click Play to watch your video project and test the menu selection on your
computer. Use the navigation controls as you would use a standard remote
control of a home DVD player.

3. Click Volume control to adjust the audio volume of your computer as you
preview your video project.
4. Click Next to proceed to the Finish step and setup the output settings for your
project and burn it onto a disc.
Tip: As you mouseover the controls, a tooltip displays its specific function.
 283

Burn
This is the final step in the disc-authoring process. Choose the disc burner and/or
select the folder where you want to output video files or a disc image files.

To burn your project onto a DVD:

1. Select Record to disc and specify the recording format.
2. Select Create DVD folders to create folders for your project and specify their
location.
3. Select Create disc image file to make an ISO image file of the DVD for later
use.
4. Select Normalize audio to make sure that irregular audio levels during
playback are prevented.

5. Click Burning Options to define additional burner and output settings.

6. Click Burn to start the burning process.

7. After successfully burning your disc, a dialog box appears from which you can
select the next step.
• Return to Start page allows you to save the current project and begin a
new one.
284 MORE PROGRAMS

• Continue brings you back to the Finish page where you can burn
another copy of your project or burn a new disc with a different series of
settings.
• Close prompts you to save your work and close DVD MovieFactory.

Burning options
• Disc burner Specify the settings for your burning device.
• Label Enter a volume name of up to 32 characters onto the VCD/SVCD/DVD.
• Drive Select the disc burner that you want to use to burn the video file.
• Copies Set the number of disc copies to burn.
• Disc type Displays the output disc format for the current project.
• Record to disc Select to enable burning of your video project onto a disc.
• Recording format Select DVD-Video format to use the DVD industry standard.
To quickly re-edit your disc without copying the file to the hard disk, select
DVD-Video (fast re-editable) which still complies with the industry standard,
and has very high compatibility when working with set-top home DVD players
and computer DVD-ROM. Select DVD+VR for DVD players supporting this
format.
• Create DVD folders This option is only enabled when the video file being
created is a DVD-Video. The files created are in preparation for burning the
video file to a DVD. This also allows the user to view the finished DVD file on the
computer using a DVD-Video player software.
• Create disc image file Select this option if you plan to burn the video file
several times. By selecting this option, you don't have to generate the file again
when you want to burn the same video file.
• Normalize audio Select to prevent irregular audio levels during playback of
your movie. Different video clips may have different audio recording levels
when created. When these video clips are put together, the volume could vary
greatly from one to another. To make volume levels consistent between clips,
Normalize audio function evaluates and adjusts the audio waveform of the
whole project to assure a balance audio level throughout the video.
• Reduce size to fit a DVD Click to reduce the video data rate of a DVD project
if its total file size marginally exceeds the disc size limit.
• Erase Disc Deletes all the data in the rewritable disc.
• Burning Options Click to adjust the advanced output settings for burning your
project.
• Delete temp files Removes all unnecessary files in your working folder.
 285

• Burn Begins the recording process.

• Required space Use the following indicators as reference when burning your
projects. These indicators help determine if you have sufficient space to
successfully burn your project onto the disc.
• Required/Available hard disk space Displays the space needed by the
working folder of the project and the space available for use in the hard
drive.
• Required/Available disc space Displays the space needed to fit the
video file in the disc and the space that is available for use.

Notes:
• Make sure your project does not exceed 4.37 gigabytes when burning onto a 4.7-
Gigabyte DVD disc.
• If you will burn a DVD with nearly 2 hours of video, consider these options to
optimize the project size: use a video data rate not higher than 4000 kbps, use
MPEG audio, or use still image menus instead of motion menus.

The Burning Options dialog box

The various options in the Burning Options dialog box determine how your discs
are burned.

• Disc burner Specify the settings for your burning device.

• Drive Select the disc burner to use in recording the video file.
• Speed Select the recording speed to use in burning the video file.
• Files to include on disc Choose additional items that you want to include on
the disc.
• Copyright information Includes copyright text or information about the
author. Click to enter the your text. You can also choose between
displaying the author, copyright text, or both.
• Project file Select to include the DVD MovieFactory project file that you
created on the disc for later use.
• Personal folder Select to include any other folders on the disc.
• Advanced settings Lets you adjust more disc burning settings.
• Test before burning Select to simulate first (it does not actually burn
yet) the VCD/SVCD/DVD burning of the video file. This will help you check
if the system speed is enough to send data to the VCD/SVCD/DVD writing
device at a specified recording speed. After the simulated burning, actual
burning then starts. Clear to burn the disc without performing a test.
286 MORE PROGRAMS

• Buffer underrun protection Select to use this technology when burning

your video file. This technology helps eliminate the buffer underrun
problem. Availability of this technology depends on the disc burner you
are using.
• Restart DVD+RW background format Select to format the DVD+RW
before recording. Enabling this option will prolong the recording process
but will ensure a successful burn. This is recommended when you are
using the DVD+RW disc for the first time.
By default, this option is not selected to ensure maximum compatibility.

• Do not close disc Select this function to create a multi-session disc for
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R.
 287

Ulead DVD DiskRecorder

With DVD DiskRecorder, users can edit and save videos in the DVD-VR format or
convert these videos to the DVD-Video format for use with DVD-RW or DVD-RAM.

DVD-VR (Video Recording) is a widely accepted video recording format often used
with hardware devices such as DVD camcorders or set-top DVD recorders. It was
created by the DVD Forum to bring the familiar functionality of VCRs to video
editing.

System requirements
To run DVD DiskRecorder on your computer, make sure the following minimum
requirements are met:

• Intel® Pentium III® 800 MHz CPU or higher (Pentium® IV 2.4 GHz
recommended)
• Microsoft® Windows® 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP
• 128MB of RAM (256MB RAM or higher recommended)
• 200MB of available HDD space for program installation
• 4GB or more of HDD space for video editing
• Windows-compatible display with at least 1024x768 resolution
• DVD burner (supporting DVD-RAM and DVD-RW discs)
• DVD-RAM or DVD-RW disc
• Windows-compatible mouse, display card, and sound card

Hardware checkup and configuration

Make sure that a DVD burner is properly connected and configured and that you
have the appropriate DVD-RW or DVD-RAM media for recording.

Running DVD DiskRecorder

Here, you can create a new video project (see “Create Disc” on page 289) or edit a
disc (“Edit Disc” on page 294).
288 MORE PROGRAMS

Important terms to know

Commonly used terminologies in the DVD-VR world are listed here to help you
better understand the DVD-VR technology and make the most of DVD
DiskRecorder.

• Program A video clip recorded by a set-top DVD recorder, captured from a

video source, or imported from a DVD video folder. A program can also be an
existing video file.
• Playlist A pre-defined sequence of video playback. The sequence consists of
one or more programs or entry points. Though playlists are not a must on a
DVD-VR disc, creating playlists are strongly recommended if you want to watch
specific scenes immediately or watch videos in the order you want.
• Entry point (cell) A customized starting point of video playback for a program
or playlist. A program or playlist can include multiple entry points. In DVD
DiskRecorder, an entry point is defined by the mark-in function and the entire
playback duration is defined from the mark-in point to the mark-out point.

Preferences
The Preferences dialog box lets you determine most of the program settings. To
open the Preferences dialog box, click Settings and options and select
Preferences or press [F6].

• Resume all confirmation dialog boxes Overrides the “Do not show again”
option and makes all confirmation dialog boxes appear.
• Check Ulead Web site every __ days Specifies how frequently the program
checks the Ulead Web site for news and updates.
• TV system Select the type of your TV system (NTSC or PAL/ SECAM).
• Working folder Enter or locate a folder for temporary files.
• Still image playback time Enter the playback duration (from 1 to 10 seconds)
for each image in a slideshow.
• Audio playback mode Determines how the audio streams of the video are
played.
• Audio export mode Determines how the audio streams of the video are
exported.
• Enable DRT-DM during playback Allows support for DRT-DM (Distributed
Real Time Defect Management) for DVD-RW discs, which marks bad sectors in
order to prevent them from being written on and improves future writing
 289

reliability. This option is available depending on the DVD DiskRecorder version

you purchase, and is enabled only when a DVD burner supports DRT-DM.

Create Disc
DVD DiskRecorder gives you an easy way to add or edit programs by adding video
files into your DVD-VR disc project.

Introduction to the workspace

5 6 7 8 9

1. Add video files 6. Project settings

2. Preview Window 7. Disc space usage
3. Program list 8. Program video clip list
4. Edit and info 9. Navigation controls
5. Settings and options

1 Add video files Use it to add videos.

2 Preview Window Use this to view your videos.

290 MORE PROGRAMS

3 Program list Select a program (video clip) to display in the Program video clip list.

4 Edit and info Use these buttons to remove, join, or separate programs and entry
points, or view program properties.

5 Settings and options Click to open a menu where you can customize the settings
for playing back video or viewing information about DVD DiskRecorder.

6 Project settings Click to view information about the project and customize its out-
put settings.

7 Disc space usage Displays the total file size and video length to be used in the disc.

8 Program video clip list Shows the selected or all program thumbnails.

9 Navigation controls Use these buttons to preview your video clips.

Adding video files

You can add video files of different formats such as AVI, MPEG, WMV, and others
to your movie.

To add a video file to your project:

1. Click Add video files to select video file(s). Use [Ctrl] or [Shift] to select
multiple files.
2. Click Open.

Editing programs
DVD DiskRecorder lets you edit your programs in the Program video clip list.

• To combine programs, use [Ctrl] or [Shift] to select multiple programs and

click .

• To divide a program into different parts, select the program, move the jog bar
to the position where it is to be separated, and click .

• To delete programs, select it or use [Ctrl] or [Shift] to select multiple

programs and click .

Protecting programs
To ensure that video clips (programs) will not be changed or removed, you can
click the lock icon next to the Program list to switch between protected and
unprotected modes. When a program is protected, only playback is allowed.
 291

Playlist
With playlists, you can watch specific video sections in a desired playback
sequence. This is done by creating a series of video scenarios (entry points)
retrieved from DVD-VR program video clips. DVD DiskRecorder lets you create and
edit playlists from your DVD-VR disc.

To add or edit a playlist:

1. Click the Playlist tab.

2. Select a playlist to edit or click Add playlist to create a new one. To delete
a playlist, select it from the list then click Remove playlist .
3. From the Program list, select a program and use the Jog Bar and the mark-
in/mark-out buttons. Then, click . (You can also drag and drop programs to
a playlist.)
4. To add more playlists or programs, repeat steps 2 to 4.
5. You can use [Ctrl] or [Shift] to select multiple programs from Program list and
drag them to the Playlist entry point list. Use edit buttons to join or

separate entry points as needed.

Setting the name for a program, playlist, or entry point

You can assign names to programs, playlists, and entry points in order to easily
identify them.

To set a program name:

1. On the Program tab, select a program from the Program list.

2. Click Set program name .

3. Enter the name, and then click OK. The new name is shown in the Program list.

To set a playlist name:

1. On the Playlist tab, select a playlist from All playlists.

2. Click Set playlist name .

3. Enter the name, and then click OK. The new name is shown in All playlists.
292 MORE PROGRAMS

To set an entry point name:

1. On the Program or the Playlist tab, right-click a video thumbnail and select
Set Entry Point Name.
2. Enter the name, and then click OK. The new name is shown at the bottom of
the thumbnail.

Exporting video or image files

DVD DiskRecorder lets you easily export your video clips in a program or playlist
into other video formats (AVI, MPEG, WMV, etc.). To speed up the workflow, you
can also create templates for video settings that you frequently use. As for a
slideshow without transition effects and background music, you can export the
slideshow to separate bitmap image files.

Note: You can decide which audio channels to export by adjusting the audio export
mode on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.

To export video files:

1. Select the video clip you want to export from the Program video clip list.
2. Right-click the video clip. Select Export Video.

3. Select a file type (and the following settings if needed).

• To use a template, click Template and select the one to be used. Select
Add Template to create a new template using the current video settings.
Select Delete Template to delete templates.
• To change the video settings, click Options to open the Video Save
Options dialog box. Click OK when finished.
4. Select the folder to save the file and enter the file name.
5. Click Save.
 293

Burning your disc

After creating the contents of your DVD-VR disc, click Next to move to the
Preview and Finish page. You are now ready to burn it onto a disc. (For
information on Certify Disc and Format Disc, see “Edit Disc” on page 294.)

To burn your disc:

1. Choose a video from Select a video to preview and use navigation controls to
preview your movie.
2. Click Burning Options and specify the following settings:
• Label The disc label name as seen in Windows Explorer.
• Disc name The disc name as seen in set-top DVD recorder.
• Disc burner The burning device that contains the disc.

3. Click Burn to begin the burning process.

294 MORE PROGRAMS

Edit Disc
Edit Disc lets you modify the existing DVD-VR content on a DVD-RW or DVD-RAM
disc. You can also format, protect, or certify a disc (also available on the Preview
and Finish page).

Formatting a disc
A DVD-VR disc must be formatted using the UDF (Universal Disc Format) 2.0
format for rewritable discs. To format a disc, click and then click OK to
start.

Protecting a disc
To ensure that all the existing DVD-VR content on a disc cannot be changed or
removed, you can click to toggle between protected and unprotected
modes. When a disc is protected, only playback is allowed.
 295

Certifying a disc
For a UDF 2.0 formatted DVD-RW disc, you can apply disc certification to scan the
disc and check if there is any problem. The certification process marks bad sectors
to improve future writing reliability. On DVD-RW burners that support DRT-DM
(Distributed Real-Time Defect Management), the certification process also moves
the data in the recoverable defected sectors (DRT-DM Level-1 and Level-2 defects,
if any) to healthy sectors to further improve data reliability.

To certify a disc, click and then click Start.

296 MORE PROGRAMS
INDEX
298 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Index
Symbols Apple QuickTime 155
.mov 155 Apply 86
.qt 155 Applying special effects 258
Archival Package 174
Numerics As a New Document 250
16 to 9 DVD 270 audio clip 49
2D Advanced Moving Path 129 Audio fade-in/out duration 274
2D basic moving path 124 Audio Filter 131
3D moving path 129 AUDIO MIXING 139
4 GB limitation 219 Audio Mixing Panel 139, 147
audio quality 244
A Audio Save Options 162
add a key frame 104 Audio transitions 102
Add Key frame 103, 165 Auto 214
Add Media 270 Auto (no time limit) 214
Add video files 289 auto audio cross-fade 42
Add/Delete Cue 72 Auto create all proxy files 174
Adding effects 39 auto cross fade 38
Adding video files 270, 290 Auto naming 214
Adding/Editing chapters 271 Auto Read 140
adjust curves 123 Auto Write 140
Adjusting color with your video Automatic color correction 121
capture board 207 Automatically save 41
Aligning clips 64 Automatically trimming 83
Alpha Channel 112
alpha channel 182 B
analog video tape 169 background color 41
animate a Moving Path 107 Balance controls 140
animate a transition 103 bass 133
animate a video filter 118 Batch capturing 226
Animation Gallery 134 Batch Convert 176
Anti-aliasing 134, 136 batch list file 168
Anti-flicker filter 274 batch video creation 159
 INDEX 299

Before capturing 211 241

Blend 111 Chapter Cues 71
Bound 260 Chunk granularity 215
Box-Wipe transition 98 Circle-Wipe 103
Buffer underrun protection 286 Clear Automation 140, 142
Burn 283 Clearing audio data 249
Burning options 284 Clip Angle 129
Burning your disc 293 clip cues 71
clip duration 75
C Clip menu 86
Calibrating files recorded from Clip Selection tool 60, 74
different sources 256 Clip Settings 134
Calibrating video clips 68 Clipboard 63
Calibrating your display 205 Clips 46
calibration settings 207 codec 152
Capture history 223 Color Calibration 68, 205
Capture Log 168 Color Clip 49
Capture options 215 color clips 49
capture plug-in 212 color correct with Levels 121
Capturing a sequence of still frames Color Correction 120
223 Color correction Tool 121
Capturing single frames 222 color filter 41
Capturing vide 210 Color Key 111
Capturing video 213 Colored Pen 118
Capturing video from a DV Complexity bar 90
camcorder 216 Composite 205
Capturing video from an HDV/HD Compression 162
camcorder 217 Connecting a DV or Digital 8
Capturing videos 290 camcorder 197
Center volume control 148 Connecting a USB camera 203
Certifying a disc 295 Connecting an analog video source
Changing audio properties 240 202
Changing pitch 254 Connecting an HDV camcorder 198
Changing speed 259 Constant bit rate 218
Changing the audio level 253 Contrast 123
Changing the view of a waveform Controlling the display and time unit
300 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

of waveforms 242 D
Converting files 175 data rate analysis 164
Copy 63 data rate analysis graph 165
Create Audio File 159, 162 Data track 157
Create Disc 289 Decay 260
Create EDL File 167 Decibel (dB) Indicator 141
Create index file for MPEG seeking Decibel Indicator 140
performance 274 Default 216
Create Multiple Files 159 default transition 96
Create Slideshow Disc 270 Defining audio input when capturing
Create Video Disc 269, 270 analog video 204
Create Video File 152, 159 Deinterlace 70
Creating a DVD 161 deinterlace 42
Creating a movie 152 Delay 260
Creating a new audio file 239 Delete Cue 72
Creating a VCD 160 Device control 169
Creating an SVCD 160 device control 211
Creating precise selections 249 Dialog boxes
Creating titles 133 Multi-trim Video 80
Cropping 157 Digital video camcorder 165
Cross Fade 261 Digital Video Project 27
Crossfade 99 DirectX Audio 262
cross-fade 102 Disc Authoring 171
Cue Manager 72 Disc space usage 290
Cues 251 disk usage 43
Current device list 165 Display aspect ratio 158
Current Position 87 display aspect ratio 42
Current position 86 Display Mode 53
Curves 123 Displayed thumbnail and text style
customize a transition 98 281
Cut 63 Distortion 129
cut a clip 77 DOLBY DIGITAL 5.1 145
Cut by Cue 75 Drag and drop 39
Cut by Position 75 drag-and-drop 46
Cylinder 129 dropped frames 221
DRT-DM 288, 295
 INDEX 301

Dual Head Device 166 eye-dropper 122

DV Recording 165 eyedropper 122
DV SmartPlay 92
DV Type-1 216 F
DV type-2 216 fade to black 99
DVD 161 Feather 122
DVD-ready MPEG-2 161 field options 69
DVP 22 field order 42
Field Order B 70
E Field-based video 69
Echo 260 File Transfer Protocol 155
Edit and info 290 File type 42
edit clips 60 Filename 53
Edit Decision List 167 Fill 250
Edit Disc 294 Fill Left 132
Edit Point 72 Fill light 121
Editing 59 Fill Right 132
Editing a slideshow 278 Fill text color 136
Editing programs 290 Filmstrip 53
EDL 167 filter thumbnails 36
effect duration 96 filters 36
empty time slot 74 final render 152
Enabling surround 146 Find Clip 73
End control point 125 Find Empty Time Slots 74
Enhance Lighting 120 Find Next 73
Enhance Lighting Tool 120 Flashback transition 100
Enhance shadow 121 Flicker reduction 70
Enhancing sound 253 Force To Render 90
Enhancing your video 278 Force to use preview mode 215
Entry point 288 Formatting a disc 294
Exponential fade 261 Frame accurate editing 59
Exporting video or image files 292 frame forward 75
External Monitor 98 Frame Rate 25
External playback device 166 frame rate 25, 152
External preview 166 frame size 25, 152
extract an audio 47 Frame Size List 89
302 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Frame type 158 image matte 114

frame-based video 69 image sequence 50, 163
Freeze after frame 69 Import Audio File 36
Freeze before frame 69 Import Image File 36
Freeze duration 68 Import Video File 36
freeze frame effect 64 Importing and editing a batch list 228
Freezing a frame 68 Importing DVD-Video 271
Importing masks 180
G Improving video signal when
Gain 123 capturing analog video 205
Gamma 123 Insert 46, 250
General Timeline 54 Insert Title Clip 133
Global filters 124 Inserting audio data 250
Group Layout 140 Inserting clips 46
Group Tree Setting 142 Instant Play 90, 100
Grouping audio tracks 142 Internet Streaming 155
Grouping clips 62 Introduction to the workspace 289
itle safe area 41
H
Halo 101 J
Hardware checkup and configuration Jog slider 75
287 jump to a cue 74
HDV Capture Plug-in 217
High Quality Playback 91 K
Highlights 121 Keep original size 157
Hinted Streaming 155 Key file 165
HSL 121 Key frame control 157
HSL wheel 122 Key Frame Controller 98
Hue 121 Key frame Controller 165
Hue Shift 123 key frame controls 103
Hue shift 123 key frame diamond 118
Hypertext Transfer Protocol 155 Key frame for every 158

I L
Image capture deinterlace 208 launcher 269
image clips 49 Layout settings 282
 INDEX 303

Levels 121 Mixer Volume 140

LFE 148 Mixer Volume Device Control 142
Lightness 121 Mixing Dolby Surround 147
Line leading 136 Mixing tracks 257
Linear fade 258, 261 Mobile package 174
Locating clips 73 mono 237
Logarithmic fade 258 Motion Control window 125
Long Echo 261 Move cursor when playing 245
Long Repeat 261 Moving Path 107
Low Frequency Effect 148 moving path 124
Lower Field First 70 Moving Path gallery 124
Luminance 123 MPEG files 160
MPEG movies 153
M MPEG-2 files 153
Making selections 60, 248 multiple key frames 106
Managing cues 252 Multi-Track Ripple 84
Manipulating objects 281 Multi-Track Ripple editing 82
Manual 214 Multi-trim Video dialog box 80
Mark-in 61, 86 Muting a waveform 256
Mark-out 61, 86
Mask 110, 119 N
Mask transitions 101 Navigation Bar 238
Master Volume Fader 140, 142 Navigation bar 86
Mattes 115 Next Edit Point 86
Maximum shuttle speed 208 Next Frame 86
Media Clip Properties 277 No Ripple mode 82
Media Pool 37 non-square pixel rendering 26, 70,
Media Source 69 156
Media type list 161 Normalize 253
Menu 39 NTSC VCD 160
Menu button 86 NTSC/PAL safe color 275
Microsoftís Advanced Streaming Number of recently opened files 245
format 155 Number of video buffers 216
Midtones 121
Mix 250 O
Mixer program 245 Offset slider 256
304 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

Organizing Effects 108 Preview Files Manager 93

Outer stroke 136 Preview Playback Options 98, 167
overlapped region 96 Preview Range 89
overlay effect 109 Preview Window 106, 107
Overlay key types 111 Preview window 88
Overlay Options 110 Preview Window Menu 89
Overview Strip 238 Previewing 89
Previewing on an external device 93
P Previewing video from your video
PAL VCD 160 source 203
Pan/Balance Control 140 Previewing your work 88
Panel Manager 20 Previous Edit Point 86
panning sound mix 149 Previous Frame 86
PAPI DV Record 165 Print To Tape 169
Parade 206 Print to Tape 92
particle effects 134 Production Library 18, 36
paste a clip 63 Profile 220
Paste Attributes 64 Program 288
Pasting attributes 63 Program list 290
Performing a fade 258 Program video clip list 290
PhotoImpact UFO files 180 project cues 71
Placing a cue 251 Project File 51
Play (Pause) 86 Project list 159
Play and edit media 276 Project Settings 273, 275
Play Preview Range 140 Project settings 290
Play/Pause 88, 140 project settings 25
Playback Options 91, 110 Project Template 27
Playing audio files 239 Protecting a disc 294
Playlist 288, 291 Protecting programs 290
post timecode 168 Push Away Insertion 83
Pre-allocate the capture file 215
Precise scan 242 Q
precise trimming 75 Quantizing a waveform 254
Preferences 40, 208, 245, 273, 288 Quick Command Panel 177
Preview 282 Quick scan 242
preview files 93 QuickTime Movie Files 155
 INDEX 305

QuickTime streaming file 155 Run Mixer 48

Running DVD DiskRecorder 287
R
RealNetworkís RealVideo 155 S
real-time previewing 89 Sample Information Window 249
Real-Time Streaming Protocol 155 Sample size 239
Realtime Transport Protocol 155 Sampling rate 239
record a movie 165 Saturation 121, 123
recording options 48 Save options 159
Recording sound 243 Saving files 239
recording volume 48 Saving files to a video 240
Reel name 168 Scan DV Tape 210
Region Selection 122 Scanning a DV tape 224
regional matte 118 Scenes & Recording Cuts 81
Relink Video File 67 Scissors tool 77
Relinking clips 67 Scroll Lock 52
Remove a key frame 104 scrub preview 92
Remove Key frame 165 scrub previews 92
Removing a mixed track 257 scrubbing 92
Removing background noise 255 Scrubbing Options 92
Removing vocals 133 Seamless capture 216
render 152 seamless capture 219
Render Preview 90 Select Device Control 92
rendering time 100 select multiple clips 60
Repeat 86 Selecting a profile 220
Replace 64, 250 sequence of images 50
Replace With 49 series of images 50
Resample quality 274 Set Preview Range 90
Resizing the program window 204 Setting names 291
Resonance 261 Setting preview options 203
Reverse command 67 Settings and Options 273
Reversing a file 260 Settings and options 290
Reversing the frames 67 Setup menus 278
Rewind 140 Setup Preferences 273
Ripple Editing 46, 82 Shadows 121
Ripple Editing examples 83 Shuttle slider 85
306 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

silence 255 SVCD 160

silence clips 49 SVCD-ready MPEG-2 161
simple mix transition 102 Synchronize video with audio 215
Single Track Ripple 83 System requirements 287
Single-Track Ripple editing 82
Slideshow image duration 274 T
Smart Check & Convert 176 template 27
Smart Package 174 Terminologies 288
Smart Relink 67, 175 Text Settings 134
Smart Trim 79 Text settings 136
SmartRender 157 Text soft edge 136
Smart-trimmed package 174 Text transparency 136
Snap 64 TGA 114
Snap to cues 245, 248 The right-click menu 277
Soft edge 98 Thumbnail 53
Sound card 146 thumbnails 39
Source window 75, 85 TI DV Record 165
Speed control 98 TIF 112
speed of clips 65 time selection 61
Sphere 129 Time Selection tool 61
Split 46 timecode 168
Split by Scene 81 Timeline 45
Split by scene (Capture Step) 213 Timeline toolbar 20
split videos 81 Timeline Window 19
Splitting the audio 64 title clip 133
Stadium 261 Title Safe Area 126
Standard toolbar 20 Title text 135
Start control point 125 tonal values 121
Start Time 73 Toolbar 238
stereo 237 Track buttons 79
stereo pan 259 Track Layout 142
Storyboard 37 Track name 62
Straight to Disc 270, 286 Track Selection 61
stretch mode 42 Transition 98
Summary Timeline 54 Transition degree 98, 103
SURROUND SOUND 145 transition effect 38
 INDEX 307

Transition Effects 36 VCD-ready MPEG-1 160

Transition effects 96, 102 Vectorscope 205
Transition Options 97 video clip 49
transitions 36 Video Editor 18
Transparency 109 video matte 114
treble 133 video mattes 114
trim 60 video project 23, 25, 173
trim an audio clip 87 Video Save Options 152
Trim Area 87 Video Track 79
Trim area 86 visibility of clips 53
Trim Handles 86 Vocal Reduction 133
trim options 78 Voice File 48
Trim window 76 voice over 47
Trimming 76 Volume Fader 140, 144
Trimming a video 278 volume levels 143
Trimming clips 74 VU Meter 140
TV safe area 275
TV system 274 W
Two-pass conversion 275 WAV 145
TXT 134 Waveform 53
Type Effect 134 waveform 237
type of video 69 Waveform display 245
Waveform monitor 205
U Wipe 103
undo 40 WMA 145
Unlinked Clips 67 WMV 155, 220
Unlock track 52 WMV streaming file 156
urn Page transition 100 WMV-HD 154
Use Split dialog box for capture Working with clips 63
settings 208 Working with cues 71, 251
Using cues with Video Editor 252 Working with selections 248
Working with silence 255
V Working with tracks 52
Variable bit rate 218 workspace 19
VCD 160
VCD player compliant 274
308 ULEAD MEDIASTUDIO PRO

X
X-Axis unit 245

Z
Zooming 240
Zooming in/out 54